Ricoh D065 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. D065
  6. Service manual

Ricoh D065 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for D065:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
D062/D063/D065/D066
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 1 of 2) 004778MIU
MAINFRAME

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D065

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D065

  • Page 1 D062/D063/D065/D066 SERVICE MANUAL (Book 1 of 2) 004778MIU MAINFRAME...
  • Page 5 D062/D063/D065/D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 1 of 2 MAINFRAME 004778MIU...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 9 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 11 LD360sp MP 6001 SP 9060sp D063 MP 7001/ LD370/ Aficio MP 7001/ 9070/ MP 7001SP LD370sp MP 7001 SP 9070sp D065 MP 8001/ LD380/ Aficio MP 8001/ 9080/ MP 8001SP LD380sp MP 8001 SP 9080sp D066 MP 9001/ LD390/ Aficio MP 9001/...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    D062/D063/D065/D066 TABLE OF CONTENTS PRODUCT INFORMATION 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION............1-1 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................1-1 1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..............1-2 1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS .....................1-5 1.4 OVERVIEW ....................1-7 1.4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...........1-7 1.4.2 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY).......1-9 1.4.3 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX) ..........1-10...
  • Page 14 2.12.1 ACCESSORIES ................2-70 2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...........2-71 Removing Tapes and Retainers ............2-71 Preparing the Finisher (D373/D374/D460)..........2-72 Attaching the Extensions for the D460..........2-72 Prepare the Cover Interposer for the D460.........2-74 Attach the Extensions to the D460............2-74 Attaching the Extensions for the D373/D374 ........2-75 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 15 Accessories ..................2-110 Installation..................2-110 2.20.4 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT (D462-20/22/23)........2-112 Accessories ..................2-112 Installation..................2-112 2.20.5 IEEE802.11A/G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J (D377) ....2-113 Accessories ..................2-113 Installation..................2-113 SP Mode Settings for 802.11a/g Wireless LAN ........2-114 2.20.6 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE C (B826) ....2-114 Accessories ..................2-114 Installation..................2-115 D062/D062/D065/D066...
  • Page 16 2.20.15 TESTING THE SD CARD/USB SLOT........2-130 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............ 3-1 3.1 PM TABLES ....................3-1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........4-1 4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ................4-1 4.1.1 DRUM....................4-1 4.1.2 DRUM UNIT ..................4-1 4.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT..............4-2 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 17 Replacement with a Used Development Unit........4-27 4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ...............4-28 4.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID..........4-28 4.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING PADS ........4-30 4.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL ..............4-30 Dusting the Drum Surface..............4-32 4.6.6 PTL....................4-33 4.6.7 QUENCHING LAMP................4-34 4.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR............4-34 D062/D062/D065/D066...
  • Page 18 4.9.3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER..............4-59 Web Unit Disassembly................4-59 Reinstallation ..................4-60 Web Unit Re-assembly ...............4-61 4.9.4 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR........4-62 Reinstallation ..................4-63 4.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT.........4-63 Reinstallation ..................4-63 4.9.6 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER ..4-63 Fusing Lamps ..................4-63 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 19 4.11.8 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT ..4-91 4.11.9 FEED UNIT .................4-92 4.11.10 PAPER FEED MOTORS............4-94 For D062/D063 ...................4-94 For D065/D066 ...................4-95 4.11.11 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ....4-96 4.11.12 RELAY SENSOR ..............4-97 4.11.13 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD ......4-98 Reinstallation ..................4-99 4.11.14 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS ............4-100...
  • Page 20 Reattaching the White Cover ............4-132 4.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING....4-133 4.14.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING ........4-133 Preparation ..................4-133 Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side.........4-133 Blank Margin..................4-134 Registration Buckle Adjustment ............4-136 4.14.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: SCANNING ........4-136 Registration: Platen Mode..............4-136 Magnification..................4-137 Sub Scan Magnification ..............4-137 D062/D063/D065/D066 viii...
  • Page 21 5.4.2 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA ......5-20 Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ........5-20 Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM..........5-21 5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............5-22 5.5.1 SP TABLES..................5-22 5.6 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK................5-23 5.7 USING THE DEBUG LOG................5-24 5.7.1 SETTING UP "SAVE DEBUG LOG"..........5-24 D062/D062/D065/D066...
  • Page 22 ENERGY SAVING 7. ENERGY SAVING ................ 7-1 7.1 ENERGY SAVE..................7-1 7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES ..............7-1 Timer Settings..................7-1 Return to Stand-by Mode..............7-2 Recommendation..................7-2 7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS ..........7-3 7.2 PAPER SAVE.....................7-5 7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION....7-5 1. Duplex:....................7-5 2. Combine mode:.................7-5 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 23 3. Duplex + Combine: ................7-5 D062 .....................7-6 D062/D063/D065/D066 APPENDICES SEE APPENDIX SECTION FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B473 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY RT43 SEE SECTION B473 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B513 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 1075/B531 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075...

  • Page 25: Read This First

    Read This First Safety, Conventions, Trademarks Safety Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that they are unplugged. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.

  • Page 26: Laser Safety

    This machine is rated as a Class 1 LED Device. It is safe for both office and EDP use. Observance of Electrical Safety Standards The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. The NVRAM on the controller board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly.
  • Page 27 location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
  • Page 28 The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate the direction of paper feed. In this manual "Horizontal" means the "Main Scan Direction" and "Vertical" means the "Sub Scan Direction" relative to the paper feed direction. Switches and Symbols Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
  • Page 29 Warnings, Cautions, Notes In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or serious injury. A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
  • Page 30 in the operating instructions. Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1. Something has spilled into the product. 2. Service or repair of the product is necessary. 3.
  • Page 31 PRODUCT INFORMATION APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS D418 FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 INSTALLATION APPENDIX: PM TABLES PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS B473 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY RT43 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES B513 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 1075/B531 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075 B762 MAILBOX CS391 D373 FINISHER SR4040/D374 FINISHER SR4030...

  • Page 33: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 35: Specifications

    Specifications 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: General Specifications Optional Equipment D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 36: Machine Configuration

    Machine Configuration 1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION Machine Item Number code D062/D063/ Mainframe D065/D066 A3/11" x 17" Tray Type 9001 D482 Inside mainframe Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 B499 RT43 (LCT) B473 LG Size Tray Type1075 B474 Inside LCT Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 D454...
  • Page 37 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A B679 In the I/F slot IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J D377 IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type K D377 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 B826 Printer/Scanner Unit Type 9001 D462 In the SD card slot D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 38 D377 Post Script3 Unit Type 9001 D462 IPDS Unit Type 9001 D462 HDD Encryption Unit Type A D377 Browser Unit Type E D430 USB2.0/SD Slot Type C D464 Outside mainframe Card Reader Bracket B498 Key Counter Bracket Type1027 B452 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 39 1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS The D062/D063/D065/D066 series are successor models to the D052/D053/D054 series. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.

  • Page 40: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products D062/D063/D065/D066 D052/D053/D054 D066: Paper feed motor is installed at the rear of the mainframe. Fusing Lamp 2 lamps 3 lamps ADF original size 4 sensors 5 sensors sensor ADF Separation Sensor...

  • Page 41: Overview

    Overview 1.4 OVERVIEW 1.4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 42 23. Tandem Tray (Tray 1) 24. Duplex Unit 25. Inverter 26. Inverter Exit Roller 27. Inverter Entrance Roller 28. Duplex Junction Gate 29. Reverse Trigger Roller 30. Exit Unit 31. Pressure Roller 32. Hot Roller 33. Scanning (ADF) 34. Exposure (ADF) D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 43: Paper Path (With Cover Interposer Tray)

    Overview 1.4.2 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY) 1. Proof Exit Tray 2. Cover Sheet Path 3. Original Path 4. By-pass Tray 5. LCT Feed 6. Vertical Transport Path 7. Finisher Exit Tray 2 8. Finisher Exit Tray 1 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 44: Paper Path (With 9-Bin Mailbox)

    4. Selected Trays 5. Turn Gates 6. Mailbox Paper Path 7. Junction Gate (paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher’s proof tray) 8. Junction Gates (two junction gates control the paper path inside the finisher) D062/D063/D065/D066 1-10...

  • Page 45: Drive Layout

    2. Drum Motor 3. Fusing/Exit Motor 4. Registration Motor 5. Toner Collection Motor 6. Paper Feed Motor 3 7. Paper Feed Motor 2 8. Lower Relay Motor 9. Paper Feed Motor 1 10. By-pass Motor 11. Development Motor 1-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 47: Installation

    INSTALLATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 95 ~ 133 08/03/2009 Key Counter Type A (B870) 07/02/2009 Added steps to USB installation 118 ~ 119...

  • Page 49: Installation Requirements

    If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where it will be: Subjected to sudden temperature changes Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner Directly exposed to heat from a heater Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 50: Machine Level

    The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the machine. Set a carpenter’s level on the exposure glass. 2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Place the copier near the power source, providing minimum clearance as shown below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 51: Dimensions

    The table below summarizes all the peripheral devices and controller options. Bnnn Name Class Comment Key Counter Bracket Type B452 Common option 1027 B473 LCT RT43 Paper bank for LT/A4 paper 81/2"x 14" Paper Size Tray B474 Paper bank for LG paper Type 1075 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 52 Punch Unit Type 3260 EU 2/4 Installed in D373, D374 B702-17 Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 2/3 Installed in D373, D374 Output Jogger Unit Type B703 Installed on D373, D374 3260 Output Jogger Unit Type B513 Installed on D460 1075 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 53 Fax Option Type 9001 Board D418-05 G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 Board Class 1: Peripheral units connected directly to the mainframe Class 2: Components installed on or in peripheral units (punches, etc.) Class 3: MFP controller options (SD cards, boards) D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 54: Power Requirements

    Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. Avoid multi-wiring. Be sure to ground the machine. Never set anything on the power cord. North America D062/D063/D065 120 V, 60 Hz: 20 A or more D066 208-240V, 12A Input voltage level...

  • Page 55: Main Machine

    Decal – Toner Supply - Multiple Decal: Power Source: Off Decal Exposure Glass: Multiple Decal – D1/E1 Multiple EU Safety Sheet (-27, -67 only) Clear Cover (-17, -29, -57 only) Ferrite Core (RFC-13) EULA Sheet: 18 languages (-28, -57, -67 only) D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 56: Installation Procedure

    Open the lower tray [A] and remove the operating instructions holder and foot risers. Open the ADF feed cover and remove the tape and retainer. Remove the tape from the back of the machine. Save the filament tape and shipping retainers to prepare the machine for shipping in the future. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 57 Raise the ADF and remove all the tape and shipping retainers around the exposure glass [A] and operation panel. Remove the shipping retaining sheet [B] under the white pad. Open the front door, open the toner bottle holder [A], then remove all tape and shipping retainers. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 58 Main Machine Open the right door and remove the tapes from the vertical transport plate. 10. Remove the PCU inner cover [A] ( x 2) and disconnect the fan motor [B] ( x 1). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-10...

  • Page 59: Removing And Filling The Development Unit

    Removing and Filling the Development Unit Before you begin, remove the toner bottle if it is installed. The toner bottle holder can be damaged if it is in the machine when you do the procedure below. Open the front door. 2-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 60 If the LCT is installed, disconnect it. This lets the front door open far enough for development unit removal. Close the supply pipe shutter [B]. While allowing the development unit [C] to slip to the right, slowly pull it out of the machine. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-12...
  • Page 61 "Developer Replacement"). 12. Rotate the toner hopper slightly 10° to 20° as you slide it up to remove it. 13. While turning the knob [A] slowly, pour in one pack of developer [B] from one end of the 2-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 62: Re-Installing The Development Unit

    Confirm that the pin [A] goes into the left side of the oval hole [B] in the development unit plate. Push the development unit in completely until it stops, then push it to the left Make sure you can see the horizontal pin in front of the plate as shown below. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-14...

  • Page 63: Initializing The Drum Settings

    After you replace developer in a machine that has been already installed, do not use SP2963; use SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to enter the lot number and initialize the TD sensor. ( p.4-43 "Developer Replacement") 2-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 64: Tandem Tray

    Remove the right tandem inner cover [A]. Re-position the side fences [B] ( x 2). The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper. Re-install the right tandem inner cover [A]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-16...
  • Page 65 Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 3). Remove the motor cover [B] ( x 5). Re-position the side fences [A] ( x 8). The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper. Re-install the motor cover and the tray cover. 2-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 66: Machine Level

    SP5959 in “Service Tables”. Machine Level Set a stand [A] at two front foot of the machine. Set the leveling shoes [C] (x2) under the feet [B], then level the machine. Two leveling shoes should be installed at the front side. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-18...

  • Page 67: Date/Time Setting

    Do SP 5853 to copy stamp data to the hard disk, then SP5853 Download turn the power off/on. Connecting the Drum Heater Connector and the Tray Heater Connector. Open the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover. 2-19 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 68: Installing The Scanner Heater

    Left stay ( p.4-17 "Scanner Wire Replacement"). Install the scanner heater [A] ( x 2) Fasten the cable with the harness clamps ( x 3). Fasten the connector [B] on the rear side of the machine ( x 1). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-20...
  • Page 69 Main Machine Connect the harness [C] to the connector [B] on the rear side of the machine. 2-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 70: A3/Dlt Feeder Kit (D482)

    2.3 A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (D482) 2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q’ty A3/DLT Tray Short connector Page size decals 2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-22...
  • Page 71 A3/DLT Feeder Kit (D482) Remove the stay [A] ( x 2). Remove the retainers [B] [C]. Draw out the tandem tray [A] completely to separate the left and right sides of the tray. Push in the right tandem tray [B]. 2-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 72 A3/DLT Feeder Kit (D482) Remove the left tandem tray [A] ( x 5). Keep these screws. Remove the front cover [A] ( x 3). Remove the right tandem tray [A] ( x 2). Keep these screws. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-24...
  • Page 73 11. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode and select the paper size for Tray 1 with SP5959-001 (Paper Size – Tray 1). For details, see SP5959 in “Service Tables”. 12. Attach the appropriate decal for the selected paper size. 2-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 74: Lct (B473)

    Lower docking pin (not grooved) Installation Instructions Paper Set Decal 2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Removing Tape Remove the filament tape from the body [A] and top cover [B] of the LCT. Remove the tape under the lid [C] of the LCT. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-26...

  • Page 75: Preparing The Main Machine

    Save the screw on the left [B]. You will need it to install the LCT. Remove the LCT connector cover [C] (x 1) and the covers over the holes for the docking pins [D]. (x 3) Installing the LCT 2-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 76 [B], then slowly push the LCT onto the pins. The release button [C] is used to unlock the LCT so it can be disconnected from the machine. Connect the plug [D] of the LCT power cord to the side of the machine. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-28...
  • Page 77 For easier access to the hole for the screw [A], you can remove the right panel [B] x 2). Switch the machine on and execute SP5959 005 (Paper Size – Tray 4 (LCT)) to select the paper size. For details, see SP5959 in “Service Tables.” 2-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 78: Lg/B4 Feeder Kit (B474)

    2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q"ty Cover B4/LG frame Bottom plate extension Rear bracket Front bracket Harness clamp Tapping hex screws - M4 x 8 Tapping screws - M4 x 8 D062/D063/D065/D066 2-30...

  • Page 79: Installation Procedure

    Lower the LCT tray. Cover the near end sensor [A], then press the tray down button [B] to lower the tray bottom plate. Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure. Disconnect the LCT from the machine. Remove the LCT upper cover [A]. 2-31 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 80 If the brackets are difficult to install, raise the bottom plate with your hand. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down ( x 2). 10. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex nuts ( x 4). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-32...
  • Page 81 The kit is set for B4. If you need to change the paper size to LG, do the following steps. 13. Move the front side fence [A] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1). 14. Move the rear side fence [B] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1). 2-33 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 82 19. Connect the LCT to the machine ( p.2-26 "LCT (B473)") 20. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode, then use SP5959 005 (Paper Size – Tray 4 (LCT) to select the new paper size. For details, see SP5959 in "Service Tables". D062/D063/D065/D066 2-34...

  • Page 83: Multi Folding Unit (D454)

    2. Paper Guide – Long 3. Paper Guide – Short (Not used) 4. Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate 5. Ground Plate 6. Screws M3x6 7. Screws M3x6 8. Screws M4x14 9. Leveling Shoes 10. Power Cord 11. Sponge Strip 2-35 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 84: Installation

    Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Tapes Remove tape from front [A] and rear [B]. Open the front door [A]. Remove all tape from inside [B]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-36...

  • Page 85: Paper Guide, Sponge Strip

    Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the unit. Ground Plate Attach the ground plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit ( x2 M3x6). 2-37 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 86: Docking

    Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 3 ( x1). Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit (or main machine). If you are connecting to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap on the I/F cable connection point. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-38...
  • Page 87 [B] Rear lower cover ( 10. Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x2). 11. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1). 12. Tighten the screws ( x3). 13. Re-attach the rear covers. 2-39 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 88: Height Adjustment

    Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level. Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test Insert the power cord socket [A] into the power connection point. Connect the power supply cord plug into a power outlet. Test the breaker switch [B]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-40...

  • Page 89: Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate

    When the plate is not being used, open the front door and store it at [B] inside the inner cover. The plate should be used when Z-folded paper (all sizes) is output to the proof tray. If the plate is not used with Z-folded output, the pages could mix and overlap. 2-41 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 90 Auxiliary Tray Holder Auxiliary Tray - Proof Auxiliary Tray - Shift Tapping Screws - M4 x 8 Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 Tapping Screws - M3 x 8 Phillips Screws w/washer - M4 x 14 Shift Tray D062/D063/D065/D066 2-42...

  • Page 91: 3000-Sheet Finisher (D460)

    3000-Sheet Finisher (D460) 2.7.2 INSTALLATION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2-43 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 92 Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers. Remove brackets [A], [B], and [C] ( x 2 each). Install the front rear bracket [A] and front joint bracket [B] ( x 2 each) (M4 x 14) on the left side of the copier. Remove the connector cover [C]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-44...
  • Page 93 (as shown). Install the table extension [A] as shown ( x 2) (M4 x 8). The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher (as shown). 2-45 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 94 If you are installing the cover interposer tray, do not attach the cushion here. Attach it to the cover interposer tray. The cover interposer tray must be installed before you dock the finisher and tray with the main machine. Install the entrance guide plate [B] ( x 2) (M3 x 6). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-46...
  • Page 95 [C]. 12. Secure the locking lever [B] ( x 1) and close the front door. 13. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier. 14. Set the leveling shoes (x 4) under the feet and level the machine. 2-47 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 96: Accessory Check

    Sensor Arm and Sensor Spacer (2 mm) Spacer (1 mm) Spring Step Screw (large) (M4 x 11) Tapping Screw (M4 x 10) Step Screw (small) (M3 x 4) Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6) Knob Punch Waste Hopper D062/D063/D065/D066 2-48...

  • Page 97: Installation

    Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2). Unpack the punch unit and remove the motor protector plate [A] ( x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] ( x 1). Reattach the cover bracket [C] ( [D] x 2). 2-49 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 98 3). Behind the inner cover at [B] and [C], press the lock tab to the right to release the inner cover from the frame. Remove the plastic knockouts [D]. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-50...
  • Page 99 At the hole just above the lock lever, use one of the screws from the paper guide removed above to fasten the remaining two spacers to the frame. These extra spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes. 2-51 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 100 16. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full sensor on the arm ( x 1, x 1), then connect the other two connectors to HP Sensor 1 [D] and CN620 [E] of the punch PCB. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-52...
  • Page 101 17. Slide the hopper [A] into the finisher. 18. Re-attach the inner cover and rear cover. 19. Close the front door and re-connect the finisher to the machine. 2-53 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 102: Jogger Unit (B513)

    Installation Procedure 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn the main machine switch off and disconnect the finisher from the main frame. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A] from the finisher and discard it. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-54...
  • Page 103 On the left and right side, attach the jogger unit frame to the side of the finisher with the screws [C] provided ( x 2). Re-attach the jogger unit cover to its frame with the screws removed in step 2 ( x 2). 2-55 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 104 Rear joint bracket Auxiliary Tray for Shift Tray (D373 Only – Not Shown) Auxiliary Tray for Proof Tray (D373 Only – Not Shown) Auxiliary Tray Storage Pocket (D373 Only – Not Shown) 3 screws (M3x6) are provided for the D373. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-56...

  • Page 105: 2000/3000-Sheet Finishers (D373/D374)

    D374 Finisher. Does punching, shifting, and corner stapling but no booklet (saddle-stitch) stapling unit. Differences in the installation procedures are noted as “D373” or “D374”. Removing Tapes and Retainers Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures. 2-57 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 106 2000/3000-sheet Finishers (D373/D374) Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping. Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the finisher. Open the front door. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers inside the finisher. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-58...

  • Page 107: Docking The Finisher

    Pull out the jogger unit [A]. Remove the tapes and retainers. Docking the Finisher If you are not installing the Cover Interposer B704: Peel the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and attach it to the finisher then go to the next step. 2-59 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 108 Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate [B] ( x 2, M3 x 6). Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14). Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-60...
  • Page 109 [D] enter their slots. Connect connector [E] to the main frame. Attach the gasket seal [F] as shown. Push the finisher against the machine. Push in lock lever [B] then reattach the screw [A]. 2-61 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 110: Attaching The Trays

    Use the round-head rivet (provided accessory) to fasten the auxiliary tray storage pocket to rear cover of the finisher. Place the auxiliary trays for the shift tray and proof tray in the pocket. D374 Attach the output tray [A]. Make sure the metal plate [B] overlaps the tray. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-62...

  • Page 111: Leveling The Finisher

    Enter the name of the staples in use for booklet stapling Staple Bind (saddle-stitching). This setting is required only for the D373. Enabling Booklet Binding (D373 Only) To enable booklet binding (saddle-stitching) for the D373, you must make sure that the 2-63 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 112: Auxiliary Trays

    Proof Exit Auxiliary Tray Follow the procedures below to install the auxiliary tray for the proof tray. First, remove the paper from the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, and continue printing. This may solve the problem. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-64...
  • Page 113 After the Z-folding job is finished, remove the tray and store it in the auxiliary tray storage pocket on the back of the finisher. Open and close the front door to re-initialize the finisher and reset the standby position of the shift tray. 2-65 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 114: Punch Unit (B702)

    Q’ty Punchout Waste Unit Slide Drive Unit Punch Waste Hopper Screws (M3 x 6) Side-to-Side Detection Unit Punching Unit 2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-66...
  • Page 115 Slide the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that pin engages correctly at the front and rear. Connect and fasten the punch unit [B] ( x 2, x 1). The connectors are coiled and tied above the PCB on the right. 2-67 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 116 10. Fasten the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, 11. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B] then connect it ( x 1). This is the 3-pin connector. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-68...
  • Page 117 14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C]. This is the 4-pin connector. 15. Connect connector and fasten the punch waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1, x 1). 16. Set the hopper [A] in its holder. 2-69 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 118 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 Adjuster plates Hinge Bracket Plate Extension (bottom) Gasket Seals Right Rear Cover Plate (D460 only) Spacer Anti-Static Brush Spacer (D460 only) Spacer (Not used) Right front corner plate (D460 only) Front door extension (bottom) D062/D063/D065/D066 2-70...

  • Page 119: Cover Interposer Tray (B704)

    Removing Tapes and Retainers Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that the copier is switched off and unplugged before starting the following procedure. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 2-71 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 120: Preparing The Finisher (D373/D374/D460)

    If you are installing the D460, modify the extensions and attach them to the finisher. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the D460". Attaching the Extensions for the D460 The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the D460 only. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-72...
  • Page 121 Remove [D] and replace it with [E] ( x 1). Remove [F] and replace it with [G] ( x 1). Plate Extension (Bottom): Remove bracket [H] from and attach it to at the end of the bottom plate extension ( x 2). 2-73 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 122: Prepare The Cover Interposer For The D460

    If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and keep the screws. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6). Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate ( x 2). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-74...

  • Page 123: Attaching The Extensions For The D373/D374

    Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8). Attach the top front cover extension [E] ( x 2, M4 x 8). Attach the rear cover extension [F] ( x 2, M3 x 6). 2-75 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 124: Attaching The Interposer Tray (D373/D374/D460)

    D460, then go to “Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine”. Attaching the Corner Plates for the D460 The corner plates are installed on the D460 only. Right Rear Corner Plate (D460 only) D062/D063/D065/D066 2-76...
  • Page 125 With the clamp [B] under the edge of the corner, align the cutout [C] in the right front corner plate with the screw, then snap it into position. With a long screwdriver inserted into the plate cutout [C], tighten the screw to fasten the right front corner plate. 2-77 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 126 Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer. Attach the front end [B] of the plate ( x 1). Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] ( x 1). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-78...
  • Page 127 Attach the lock lever [D] ( x 1). 10. Connect the connector [G] to the copier. Check the duct [A] on the left side of the machine. Make sure that the sponge does not prevent air flow through this duct. 2-79 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 128: Output Jogger Unit (B703)

    The Output Jogger Unit B703 can be installed only on the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher D373/D374. Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures. Turn the main machine switch off. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-80...
  • Page 129 While you hold the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame. Fasten connector [B] to the socket ( x 1). 2-81 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 130 Output Jogger Unit (B703) Attach the jogger unit to the finisher ( x 2). Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit ( x 2). Set SP 6118 to 1 after you install the B703 jogger unit. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-82...

  • Page 131: Mail Box (B762)

    Guide plate Tapping screws - M3x8 Decals (bin display) 2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE The Mail Box B762 can be installed only in the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher D373/D374. Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure. 2-83 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 132 Mail Box (B762) Remove the filament tape [A]. Handle the mailbox carefully. The corner leaf [B] can be damaged easily. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-84...
  • Page 133 If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the D373/D374, remove it. The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher ( x 1). Remove the bracket [B] ( x 1). 2-85 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 134 2, M3x8). Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x 4, M3x8). Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox. Give the decals [D] to the customer for notation and attaching at the correct location. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-86...

  • Page 135: Copy Tray (B756)

    Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list. Description Q’ty Copy Tray Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used) Tapping Screw (not used) Large Cap Small Cap Tapping Screw (M4 x 8) Harness Clamp Paper Height Sensor Actuator Arm Bracket Sensor Bracket Actuator Arm 2-87 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 136: Installation

    Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C]. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x 3). Attach the sensor harness [E] ( x 1, x 4). Attach the actuator [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-88...
  • Page 137 Copy Tray (B756) Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x 2). Attach the tray [B]. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes Attach the large cap [D] to cover the finisher power connection point. 2-89 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 138: Key Card Bracket (B498), Key Counter Bracket (B452)

    Check the accessories and their quantities against this list. Description 1. Key Card Table 2. Harness Clamp 3. Tapping Screws (M3 x 8) 4. Tapping Screws (M4 x 14) 5. Stud 6. Decal 7. Key Card Table Support D062/D063/D065/D066 2-90...

  • Page 139: Key Counter Bracket B452 Accessories

    2. Rear Bracket 3. Front Bracket 4. Tapping Screws (M3 x 6) 5. Tapping Screws (M4 x 8) 6. Tapping Screws (M4 x 16) 7. Harness 8. Shoulder Screw 9. Key Counter Bracket Cover 10. Key Counter Bracket 2-91 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 140: Installation

    Attach the key counter holder [C] to the key counter bracket ( x2). Attach the key counter bracket cover [D] ( x2). Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-92...
  • Page 141 Remove the three caps [C]. Attach the stud [D]. Put the keyholes [A] of the key card table [B] over the heads of the shoulder screws, as shown above. Then tighten the screws to attach the table (M4 x 14, x2). 2-93 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 142 Attach the key counter bracket [A] ( x 2). Attach the harness [B] to the key counter bracket and the machine ( x 1). Attach the bracket support [C] to the side of the copier ( x 2). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-94...

  • Page 143: Installation

    2.17 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) 2.17.1 INSTALLATION 1. Attach the connection board [A] (rocking support [B] x 4). 2. Connect the harness [C] to CN003. 3. Connect the harness [D] to CN004. 4. Connect the harness [C] to CN218 on the BCU. 2-95 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 144 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) Rev. 08/03/2009 5. Clamp the harness at two points [E]. 6. Pass the harness through the edge saddle [F]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-96...
  • Page 145 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) Rev. 08/03/2009 7. Clamp the harness at two points [G]. 2-97 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 146 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) Rev. 08/03/2009 8. Pass the harness through the opening [H]. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-98...

  • Page 147: Copy Connector Kit (B328)

    Keytop for B234 (Not used) Keytop Keytop for B132 (Not used) 2.18.2 PREPARATION Before you begin the installation procedure: Measure the distance between the machines to be connected. Confirm that the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines. 2-99 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 148: Installation

    Remove these parts: Rear upper cover ( x2) ( Replacement and Adjustment – Operation Panel and External Covers) Rear lower cover ( x2) ( Replacement and Adjustment – Operation Panel and External Covers) Controller box cover ( x 13) D062/D063/D065/D066 2-100...
  • Page 149 13. Attach the "Other Function" key [I] (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if the printer/scanner option is not installed. 14. Attach the other end of the connection cable to the copy connector board installed in the other machine. 2-101 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 150: Usb2.0/Sd Slot Type C (D464)

    2.19.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q"ty USB2.0/SD Slot Type C USB Cable Tapping Screw Screw Decal 2.19.2 INSTALLATION Rear upper cover ( p.4-8 "Rear Covers") Right upper cover ( p.4-7 "Right Covers") Left upper cover ( p.4-8) Operation Panel ( p.4-6) D062/D063/D065/D066 2-102...
  • Page 151 Turn the operation panel over and put it on the machine. Put some cloths or sheets of paper between the machine and the operation panel, so as not to scratch the exposure glass. Clip tray [A] ( x 3) Pass the USB cable [A] under the bracket [B]. 2-103 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 152 USB2.0/SD Slot Type C to bracket [A] of the operation panel. The other screw must be installed on the right side [B]. 10. Put the ground wires [A] and the USB Cable [B] into the machine as shown in the D062/D063/D065/D066 2-104...
  • Page 153 12. Pass the USB Cable to the rear side of the machine. 13. Pass the USB Cable through the rear upper cover [A]. 14. Install the rear upper cover ( p.4-8 "Rear Covers") 15. Insert the USB Cable in the USB slot on the controller box. 2-105 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 154 21. Enter Scanner SP Mode and change SP1013-001 from “0” to “1”. If SP1013-001 is not set to “1” “Incompatible USB device connected” will be displayed. 22. Perform SD Card/USB Slot test ( p.2-126 Testing the SD Card/USB Slot). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-106...

  • Page 155: Mfp Options

    SD card. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card. Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct 2-107 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 156: Merging Applications

    14. Turn the main machine on. 15. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card in Slot 1 are enabled: User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version 16. Turn the main machine off again. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-108...

  • Page 157: Undo Exec

    Pushing in the SD Card also releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in place. 2-109 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 158: Storing Copied Sd Cards

    SD card with SP5873 -1. Installation Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-110...
  • Page 159 On the operation panel, remove the dummy keytops [A] (second and third from the bottom) and discard them. Install the "Printer" keytop [B] then the "Scanner" keytop [C]. Select either the English set or Symbol set for installation. The correct order is: Printer (upper) Scanner (lower) 2-111 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 160: Postscript3 Unit (D462-20/22/23)

    SD card with SP5873 -1. Installation Switch the machine off. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). Insert the PS3 SD Card [B] into Slot 1. Switch the machine on. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-112...

  • Page 161: Ieee802.11A/G Interface Unit Type J (D377)

    It must be installed on the left rear corner of the main machine where it will not be obstructed by the operation panel. ANT2. Antenna 2 only receives. It is installed on the right rear corner of the machine. Attach ANT1 [C] to the left rear corner. 2-113 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 162: Accessories

    WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). 2.20.6 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE C (B826) Accessories Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q'ty Bluetooth card Bluetooth card cover Bluetooth board Bluetooth card adapter D062/D063/D065/D066 2-114...

  • Page 163: Rev. 08/03/2009

    2.20.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E (D377) Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Q'ty File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) Installation Switch the machine off. Remove the cover of Slot A ( x 2). 2-115 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 164 Note: This function is applied to both J2K and TIFF files and is particularly useful for copying large J2K documents quickly with only a slight loss in image quality. Does not apply the features of the "1" setting when files are D062/D063/D065/D066 2-116...

  • Page 165: Hdd Encryption Unit Type A (D377)

    If this setting is "Off" tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do the installation procedure. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled: [User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication Management"> "Available Settings 2-117 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 166: Seal Check And Removal

    Remove the SD card cover ( x 1). The HDD encryption SD card should be in Slot 1. Execute SP 5878-002 to enable the HDD Encryption. Log in as Admin. Go to User Tools/System Settings/Administrator tools/Page 4 – Machine Data D062/D063/D065/D066 2-118...

  • Page 167: Recovery From A Device Problem

    10. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board. 11. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status. 12. Remove the SD card from slot 2. 2-119 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 168: Clearing The Nvram

    1. Data Overwrite Security SD Card 2. Operating Instructions CD-ROM 3. Comments Sheet (17 languages) Before You Begin… Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The correct type for this machine is type "H". D062/D063/D065/D066 2-120...

  • Page 169: Seal Check And Removal

    Check the two box seals [A] on the corners of the box. Make sure that the seals are attached at both corners. The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not 2-121 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 170: Installation

    HDD Format Option: GW4a_zoffyx: DataOverwriteSecurity Unit D3775902A / 1.01x D3775902A / 1.01x The same two numbers must be listed in both sections of the SMC report If the numbers are not identical, this means the option was not installed correctly. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-122...
  • Page 171 18. Check the overwrite erase icon [A]. The icon [B]: This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting. The icon [C]: This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. 2-123 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 172: Browser Unit Type E (D430)

    Login with the administrator user name and password. Touch “Extended Feature Settings” twice on the LCD. Touch “Install” on the LCD. 10. Touch “SD card”. 11. Touch the “Browser” line. 12. Under “Install to”, touch “Machine HDD” and touch “Next”. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-124...

  • Page 173: Copy Data Security Unit Type C (B829)

    - The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. - You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. 2.20.11 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829) Accessories Description Q'ty PCB IPU Option 2-125 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 174: Installation

    Switch the machine on. Login in as the System Administrator. Push [User Tools]. Touch "System Settings". Touch "Administrator Tools". Touch next 2 or 3 times until you see "Data Security for Copying". Touch "ON". Touch "OK" to enable the setting. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-126...

  • Page 175: Vm Card (D463)

    Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x1). Insert the SD card [B] into SD slot 2. Switch the machine on. The installation will start automatically. The installation will take 5 to 10 minutes. Replace the sixth key-slot cover with the "Other function" key. 2-127 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 176: Accessories

    Only one PCI slot (A) is available for one of these options: Centronics 1284 IEEE 801.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN) (D377) Bluetooth Interface Unit (B826) File Format Converter (D377) If another card is installed in A, you must remove it before installing this card. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-128...
  • Page 177 MFP Options Rev. 06/15/2011 Installation Switch the machine off. Remove the cover [A] of Slot A ( x 2). Insert the 1284 Centronics board [B] into Slot A and fasten it with the screws. 2-129 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 178: Accessories

    Accessories Description Q'ty Gigabit Ethernet Ferrite Core Screw Cap for Network Slot Installation Switch the machine off. Remove the controller box cover ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)"). Remove the Gigabit Ethernet slot cover [A] ( x 1). D062/D063/D065/D066 2-130...
  • Page 179 [B]: 30 mm or more Connect the network cable to the slot for Gigabit Ethernet. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2.0: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page 2-131 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 180: Testing The Sd Card/Usb Slot

    7. Press [OK]. 8. Press the [Start] key. When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears. 9. Press [Exit]. 10. Remove the memory device from the media slot. Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-132...

  • Page 182: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 184: Pm Tables

    PM Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 PM TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: PM Tables D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 186: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 2/22/2011 Delete unnecessary step. 5/21/2010 Replace the BCU.

  • Page 188: General Cautions

    Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured with a screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit is loose, poor contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise, resulting in unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change is the worst case). D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 189: Transfer Belt Unit

    Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based compounds. Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust. Then clean with alcohol if any toner still remains. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 190: Development

    When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any toner falling from it. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 191: Fusing Unit

    4.1.11 USED TONER We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 192: Special Tools And Lubricants

    Test Chart – S5S – DF (10 Sheets/Set) G0219350 Loop Back Connector B6455010 SD (Secure Digital) Card – 64 MB 4.2.2 LUBRICANTS Part No. Description A2579300 Grease Barrierta – JFE 5 5/2 52039502 Silicon Grease G-501 54429101 Setting Powder D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 193: Operation Panel And External Covers

    Operation panel [A] ( x 3, x 1, ground cable x 1) 4.3.2 FRONT DOOR While supporting the front door [A] with one hand, press down on the hinge bracket [B] then raise the door slightly to remove it. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 194: Right Covers

    Right lower cover [D] ( x 2) After removing the screws, slide the cover down to remove it. When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs [E] on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 195: Left Covers

    Slide down to remove. When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine. 4.3.5 REAR COVERS Rear upper cover [A] ( x 2) Slide down to remove. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 196 When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws. Rear lower cover [B] ( x 2) When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 197: Scanner

    1) Connectors [C] ( x 4) ADF base left and right plates [D] ( x 2) While holding the ADF firmly, slide the ADF back and lift the large end of the keyholes over the shoulder screws. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-10...

  • Page 198: Top Covers

    ADF ( p.4-10) Top inside cover [A] ( x 2) Top left cover [B] ( x 1) Top right cover [C] ( x 1) Operation panel [D] ( x 3, x 1, ground cable x 1) 4.4.2 EXPOSURE GLASS 4-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 199: Scanner Original Size Sensors

    Position the exposure glass first. Make sure that the arrow mark is in the upper left corner. When re-installing the left cover, make sure it is seated correctly. 4.4.3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS Exposure glass ( p.4-11) Original width sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Lens block ( p.4-13) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-12...

  • Page 200: Lens Block

    PCB up. Re-assemble the machine, then perform the scanner and printer adjustments. ( p.4-133) 4.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP Exposure glass ( p.4-11) Operation panel ( p.4-6) Push the 1st scanner [B] to the cutout [A] in the scanner frame. 4-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 201: Siob

    Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers. 4.4.6 SIOB Lens block ( p.4-13) Top right cover ( p.4-10 "ADF and Top Covers") Top right bracket [A] ( x 4) Right upper cover ( p.4-7 "Right Covers") SIOB cover [B] ( x 6) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-14...

  • Page 202: Scanner Motor

    SIOB [C] ( x 4, all 4.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR SIOB cover ( p.4-14) Remove three screws. Release a screw, move down the bracket [A], release the timing belt [B] and then remove the scanner motor bracket [C] ( x 1). 4-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 203: Scanner Hp Sensor

    Scanner Scanner motor [D] ( x 2). 4.4.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR ADF ( p.4-10) Top inside cover ( p.4-11 "Top Covers") Top right cover ( p.4-11 "Top Covers") Scanner HP Sensor [A] ( x 1, all hooks) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-16...

  • Page 204: Scanner Wire Replacement

    Loosen the screw [4] of tension bracket 1. Disconnect the end of the wire at [A]. Remove lock bracket [B] of the 1st scanner ( x1). Disconnect the wire from the pulley [C] ( x1). Remove the wire from the scanner. 4-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 205: Scanner Wire Reinstallation And Scanner Position Adjustment

    Position the 2nd scanner [C] so that its holes are aligned, and insert the positioning pins [D]. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner. Tighten the screw of the tension bracket. Attach the pulley and tighten its lock screw. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-18...
  • Page 206 Scanner 10. Remove the positioning pins (x4). 11. Remove the tape from the pulley. 12. Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged correctly. The 1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly. 4-19 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 207: Laser Unit

    Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1) LD unit, 2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector. 4.5.1 { XE "CAUTION DECALS" }CAUTION DECALS Two caution decals are provided for the laser section. 4.5.2 LD UNIT, POLYGON MOTOR AND POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD Exposure glass ( p.4-11) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-20...
  • Page 208 Polygon motor drive board [D] ( x 3, x 3) Before fastening the polygon motor in place ( x 3, x 1), make sure that the glass panel of the laser port is facing to the right (toward the mirrors in the 4-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 209: Sp Adjustments

    4.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT Right side cover ( p.4-7 "Right Covers") If the optional LCT is installed, disconnect it ( x 1). Development unit fans [A] ( x 5, x 2) Synchronization detector [B] ( x 1, x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-22...

  • Page 210: Laser Unit Alignment

    "Right Covers") Loosen the screws of the laser exposure unit ( x 3). While watching the scale [A], use a flathead screwdriver [B] to move the laser exposure unit left or right to adjust the position of the unit. 4-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 211 The scale is set for increments of 1 mm. After adjustment, tighten the screws on the laser exposure unit, re-assemble the machine and print the pattern again with SP2902-003 No.18. Check the pattern. Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is required. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-24...

  • Page 212: Drum Unit

    Open the front door. Shutter cover [A] ( x 1) Lock screw [B] Toner bottle [C] Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right. PCU inner cover [D] ( x 2, x 1) 4-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 213 Allow the unit to slip to the right, then slowly pull it out of the machine. If the LCT is installed, you may need to disconnect it so the front door can open far enough to allow removal of the development unit. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-26...

  • Page 214: Drum Re-Installation

    Reattach all removed parts. Replacement with a Used Development Unit When using a development unit from another machine for test purposes, execute the following procedure. Check the value of SP2220 (Vref Manual Setting) in both the machine containing the 4-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 215: Charge Corona Unit

    4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT Remove the development unit. ( p.4-25) Charge corona unit [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID Remove the charge corona unit. ( p.4-28) Grid [A] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-28...
  • Page 216 After replacing the charge corona wire, make sure that the wire cleaner pads are engaged correctly with the wires. After replacing the wire, set SP2001-001 (Charge Roller Bias Adjustment – Applied Voltage for Image Processing) to the default. 4-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 217: Charge Corona Wire Cleaning Pads

    Cleaning pad [A] ( x 1) 4.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL Remove Development unit ( p.4-25). Charge corona unit ( p.4-28). Drum unit [A] ( x 1, x 2) Grasp the drum unit by the knob to remove it from the machine. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-30...
  • Page 218 Never use alcohol to clean the surface of the OPC drum. Blow dry the OPC drum, then wipe clean with a clean, slightly damp cloth. Before installing a new drum, dust the surface of the OPC drum carefully with setting powder. (See below.) 4-31 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 219: Dusting The Drum Surface

    Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45-90 degree portion [C] (about 1/4 of the total drum surface). Apply enough powder so the area turns white. If setting powder is not available, use waste toner instead of drum setting powder. However, this could cause dirty backgrounds on the first copies. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-32...

  • Page 220: Ptl

    Never rotate the drum anti-clockwise. 4.6.6 PTL Remove these parts: OPC drum ( p.4-30) PTL bracket [A] ( x 2) PTL [B] ( x 1) Reinstallation The shoulder screw [C] must be attached again at its initial location. 4-33 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 221: Quenching Lamp

    4.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR Remove: OPC drum ( p.4-30). Drum potential sensor [A] ( x 2, x 1) After replacing the drum potential sensor, do SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is on). D062/D063/D065/D066 4-34...

  • Page 222: Cleaning Filter

    New blades are treated with special setting powder, so avoid touching the edge of a new cleaning blade. If the edge of a new blade is accidentally wiped clean, dust it lightly with some toner before installing it. 4-35 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 223: Cleaning Brush

    After replacing the cleaning brush, clean the ID sensor to make sure that it is clean and free of toner. Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands. Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-36...

  • Page 224: Pick-Off Pawls

    Remove: OPC drum ( p.4-30) Pick-off pawl bracket [A] ( x 2) Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1) 4.6.13 ID SENSOR Remove: OPC drum ( p.4-25) Pick-off pawls ( p.4-37) ID sensor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4-37 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 225: Drum Motor

    Flywheel ( x 3) (not shown) Three gears [A] [B]( x 1, x 2, Timing belt x 1) Gears [A] are different in each model. D062 and D063 have black gears, but D065 and D066 have white ones. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-38...

  • Page 226: Toner Collection Bottle

    Remove the lock pin [B], then pull out the toner collection bottle [C] and its base [D]. Detach the bottle from the base clamp [E] and replace it. 4.6.16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT Remove: Development unit( p.4-43 "Removal ") Pressure release tube, only for D066 ( p.4-43 "Developer Replacement") 4-39 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 227: Ozone Filters

    Drum Unit Toner separation unit [A] ( x 3, tube x 1) 4.6.17 OZONE FILTERS Filter cover [A] ( x 1). (The filter cover is on the back of the machine.) Ozone filter (right) [B] Ozone filter (left) [C] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-40...

  • Page 228: Optics Dust Filter

    Open the front door. Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right. Remove the PCU inner cover. Pull out the internal dust filter [A]. 4.6.20 TONER COOLING FAN Operation panel ( p.4-6) 4-41 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 229 Drum Unit Toner cooling fan unit [A] ( x 2, x 1). Toner cooling fan [B] ( x 2). Make sure the decal is facing down when reinstalled. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-42...

  • Page 230: Development Unit

    Removal Remove the toner hopper [A] ( x 2) Rotate the toner hopper very slightly (10° to 20°) as you slide it up to remove it. To avoid toner spill, hold the hopper level as you remove it 4-43 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 231: Reinstallation

    10. Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed. 11. Continue to turn the knob several times to prevent clumping in the developer. Reinstallation Hold the hopper perfectly level when re-attaching it, to prevent toner from entering the rails of the development filter. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-44...

  • Page 232: Development Filter

    Filter bracket top [B] Development filter [C] Filter bracket [D] Make sure that the rails where the development filter bracket [C] connects to the development unit are clean and free of toner. If there is any toner in the rails, wipe 4-45 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 233: Entrance Seal And Side Seals

    Clean the entrance seal bracket before re-installing it. When re-installing, make sure the tabs [C] and notches are engaged at four locations. Side seals [D] Remove the side seals from both ends, clean the area, and replace with new D062/D063/D065/D066 4-46...

  • Page 234: Reinstalling

    Attach the seals [A] as shown in the above diagrams. Reinstall the entrance seal bracket. [B] is incorrect. [C] is correct. 4.7.4 TD SENSOR Remove: Development unit ( p.4-25 "Development Unit Removal") TD sensor ( x 1) [A] 4-47 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 235: Toner End Sensor

    Before installing a new toner end sensor, clean the toner end sensor port [C]. 4.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR Open the front door. Swing the toner unit out of the machine and remove the toner bottle. Bracket [A] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-48...

  • Page 236: Cleaning Requirement

    2 screws on the bottom, 1 screw on the side. Toner supply motor bracket [C] ( x 2) Toner supply motor [D] ( x 2) Cleaning Requirement The toner pan [E] must be cleaned at every PM interval (300 K). 4-49 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 237: Development Motor

    Drive rod [C] Lift the toner pump tube to disengage the drive rod, pull out the rod, and push the rubber tube aside. Development motor bracket [D] ( x 3, x 1) Development motor [E] ( x 4) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-50...

  • Page 238: Transfer Belt Unit

    The transfer belt unit can be removed without removing the OPC drum unit. However, the transfer belt unit must be removed carefully to avoid scratching the surface of the transfer belt on the OPC drum unit [D]. 4-51 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 239: Transfer Belt Removal

    To avoid scratching the belt on the guide, never rotate the belt unit farther than 90 degrees. Release the drive roller [E] ( x 2). Press in on the drive roller to collapse the unit into a “U” shape [F]. Remove the belt and replace it. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-52...

  • Page 240: Re-Installation

    Confirm that both the ground and transfer current terminal are connected and that the harnesses are not touching the release lever. After re-installing the transfer belt unit, turn the belt and confirm that the toner collection coil turns. The transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade must always be replaced together. 4-53 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 241: Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade

    Work carefully around the transfer power pack located inside the transfer belt unit, especially when cleaning with a vacuum cleaner, to avoid damaging the power pack with static electricity. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-54...

  • Page 242: Discharge Plate

    Disconnect the 6 small seal case tabs [D]. Remove the discharge plate [E]. Reinstallation Set the discharge plate and make sure that it is perfectly flat before re-connecting the tabs. Before re-attaching the bracket [C], make sure that all the tabs are connected. 4-55 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 243: Transfer Power Pack

    Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire is below the wire guides on the right. Pass the ground terminal wire under the top connector of the solenoid bracket and tighten all the screws of the solenoid bracket. Make sure the wire is below all the wire guides at the top. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-56...

  • Page 244: Fusing Unit

    Inner cover [B] ( x 3) Pull the fusing unit release lever, then pull the unit out on the rail supports. At reassembly, make sure that the harness of the web drive motor is not pinched by the inner cover. 4-57 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 245: Fusing Unit Thermistors And Thermostats

    Remove the fusing unit ( p.4-57) Upper cover [A] ( x 1) Press in on the internal pawls [B] to release them then remove them. Make sure that the pawls [B] engage correctly when you reinstall the unit. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-58...

  • Page 246: Reinstallation

    If the harness is not positioned between the between the bracket ribs shown under "Incorrect" below), this could cause an error (SC542 or SC545). 4.9.3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER Web Unit Disassembly Open the front door and pull out the fusing unit on its support rails. 4-59 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 247: Reinstallation

    After replacing the web with a new one, you must execute SP1902-001 (Fusing Web Used Area Display/Setting) to reset the web consumption count to zero. This SP code must be executed to release SC550. ⇒ Unnecessary step deleted. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-60...

  • Page 248: Web Unit Re-Assembly

    After installing bushing [C], rotate the shaft right to lock it, then attach the lock screw Set the web [D] under the feeler [E] of the web end sensor Attach bushing 2 [F] Attach the new web roll [G] and wind it tight so no slack remains 4-61 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 249: Web Motor And Web End Sensor

    Web unit and end cover ( p.4-59 "Web Unit Disassembly") Bracket [A] ( x 1) Web motor positioning bracket [B] ( x 1) Web motor [C] Web motor/sensor mount [D] ( x 3) Web end sensor [E] ( x 1, harness x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-62...

  • Page 250: Reinstallation

    4.9.6 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER If you wish to remove the pressure roller only, without removing the hot roller and fusing lamps, please do not use this procedure. Use the procedure in the next section. Fusing Lamps Fusing unit ( p.4-57) 4-63 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 251 Fusing Unit Rear terminal connector bracket [A] ( x 2, metal clamp x 3, [B] x 6) Rear fusing lamp holder [C] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-64...
  • Page 252 Fusing Unit Plate [D] ( x 1) Disconnect two harnesses [E] Front fusing holder [F] ( x 1) 4-65 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 253: Hot Roller And Pressure Roller

    Hot Roller and Pressure Roller Use this procedure when you want to remove both rollers. Remove the web unit ( p.4-59) Pressure arm [A] Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-66...
  • Page 254 C-clamps (both ends) [B] Drive gear [C] Bushings (both ends) [D] Bearings [E] Hot roller [F] Entrance guide plate [A] ( x 2) Pressure roller [B] ( x 2) The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be replaced together. 4-67 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 255: Pressure Roller

    Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could generate gas. 4.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER Use this procedure if you need to remove only the pressure roller. Remove: Fusing unit ( p.4-57) Turn the fusing unit upside down. Lower cover [A] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-68...

  • Page 256: Spring Adjustment

    Attaching the springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the springs to the upper holes only for especially thin paper. 4.9.8 STRIPPER PAWLS Remove: Fusing unit ( p.4-57) Top cover [A] Bracket [B] ( x 1, spring x 1) 4-69 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 257: Nip Band Width Adjustment

    Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly black. The band, called the nip band [A], should be 9.0 ± 0.7 mm at the center. When the fusing is incorrect (wrinkles, offset, curl), measure the nip band D062/D063/D065/D066 4-70...

  • Page 258: Fusing Unit Exit Sensor

    Fusing unit ( p.4-57) Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit [A] Exit guide plate [B] ( x 2) Fusing exit sensor holder [C] ( x 2) Plate spring [D] Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 3) 4-71 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 259: Fusing/Exit Motor

    Rear upper cover ( p.4-8 "Rear Covers") Open the BCU ( x 4) CNB bracket [A] ( x 4, x all) Timing belt [B] Fusing/exit motor bracket [C] ( x 3) Fusing/exit motor ( x 2) inside the bracket (not shown) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-72...

  • Page 260: Fusing Exit Sensor And Exit Unit Entrance Sensors

    Open the front door and pull out the exit/inverter unit. Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 2) Fusing exit sensor [B] ( x 1) Exit unit entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x 2) Exit unit entrance sensor [D] ( x 1) 4-73 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 261: Duplex Unit

    To re-install the duplex unit, insert the duplex unit partially, only until it enters the black guide rail, then re-attach each slide rail roller. Next, push the duplex unit into the machine completely. This method prevents interference from the guide plate during installation. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-74...

  • Page 262: Duplex Unit Side-To-Side Adjustment

    A smaller value shortens the distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex tray. If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the duplex unit. For details, see "Service Tables". 4-75 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 263: Duplex Motors

    Duplex Unit 4.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS Duplex Inverter Motor Remove the cover [A] ( x 3) Inverter motor bracket [B] ( x 3) Inverter motor [C] ( x 1, x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-76...

  • Page 264: Duplex Jogger And Transport Motors

    Duplex Unit Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors Jogger motor [A] ( x 1, x 2) Transport motor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, x 3, timing belt x 1) Transport motor [C] ( x 2) 4-77 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 265: Duplex Sensors

    4.10.5 DUPLEX SENSORS Jogger HP Sensor Duplex unit release lever [A] ( x 2) Jogger HP sensor [B] ( x 1, x 2, x 1) Duplex Entrance Sensor Bracket [A] ( x 2) Duplex entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-78...

  • Page 266: Duplex Transport Sensor 3

    The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching. Remove the screw [B] to release the sensor bracket below. Transport sensor 3 [C] ( x 1) Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1 & 2 Cross-stay [A] ( x 4) Reverse trigger roller shaft [B] 4-79 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 267: Duplex Jogger Belt Adjustment

    Transport sensor 2 [G] ( x 1, x 1) 4.10.6 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT Remove: Cross stay ( p.4-79 "Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1 & 2") Reverse trigger roller shaft ( p.4-79 "Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1 & D062/D063/D065/D066 4-80...
  • Page 268 [A]. If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten the screw. 4-81 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 269: Paper Feed

    4.11.1 PAPER TRAY Tandem Tray Open the front door. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right [C] sides of the tandem tray. Remove the left tandem tray [D] ( x 5). D062/D063/D065/D066 4-82...
  • Page 270 When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [A] ride on the slide rail [B]. When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [C] is set behind the stopper [D] on the frame. 4-83 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 271: Universal Tray

    Pull tray 2 or tray 3 [A]. Lift the tray [B] out of the drawer. 4.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT Turn off the machine. Pull out the tandem feed tray. Rear bottom plate [A] ( x 1) Return sensor [B] ( x 1). D062/D063/D065/D066 4-84...

  • Page 272: Rear Fence Hp Sensor Replacement

    Rear HP sensor [D] ( x 1) 4.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT Turn off the machine. Remove the right tandem tray ( p.4-82) Inner cover [A] ( x 2) Side fences [B] ( x 1 each) 4-85 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 273: Bottom Plate Lift Wire Replacement

    Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. The shaft must be removed to replace the lift wire of the bottom plate. Remove: Right tandem tray ( p.4-82 "Tandem Tray") Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-86...

  • Page 274: Reinstallation

    1, bushing x 1) Gear [F] Bottom plate lift wire [G] Reinstallation Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in the hole [D]. Position the wire as shown [E]. Do not cross the wires. 4-87 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 275: Tandem Tray Paper Size Change

    Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray [B] from the left tandem tray. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C] ( x 2). Re-position the side fences [D] ( x 1 each). A4: Outer slot position LT: Inner slot position Re-install the right tandem inner cover. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-88...
  • Page 276 Remove the DC motor cover [F] ( x 5). Remove the rear side fence [G] ( x 4) and re-position the rear cover [H] ( x 2). Re-position the side fences [I] [J] ( x 4). A4: Outer slot position LT: Inner slot position 4-89 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 277 13. Reinstall the rear bottom plate. 14. Input the new paper size into SP5959-001 (Paper Size – Tray 1). 15. Do the printer adjustments. See "Print Image Adjustment" at the end of this section. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-90...

  • Page 278: Tandem Tray Side Registration

    Loosen the screws and adjust the position of the plate [B]. Adjustment range: 0 ± 2.0 mm adjustment step: 1.0 mm/step 4.11.8 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT Remove the tandem tray or universal tray ( p.4-82 "Paper Tray "). 4-91 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 279: Feed Unit

    (Tray 2, Tray 3), are similar. These rollers are interchangeable. Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement. 4.11.9 FEED UNIT Remove: Front door ( p.4-6) LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover ( p.4-97 "Relay Sensor") D062/D063/D065/D066 4-92...
  • Page 280 Toner collection bottle [B] Vertical transport guide [C] Inner cover [D] ( x 2) Reinstallation When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover then insert from [E]. Guide plate [F] ( x 1) (1st feed unit only) 4-93 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 281: Paper Feed Motors

    To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it carefully and slowly. 4.11.10 PAPER FEED MOTORS D062/D063 have the paper feed motor in each feed unit. However, D065/D066 have the feed motors at the rear of the machine.
  • Page 282 When removing bracket [C], no connectors need to be disconnected. Remove two screws and the bracket [D]. Remove two screws and a spring, and then remove the paper feed motor [E] ( x 1). For D065/D066 Right lower cover ( p.4-7 "Right Covers") Feed unit ( p.4-92)

  • Page 283: Separation Roller Pressure Adjustment

    The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done: When feeding special paper, especially thick paper D062/D063/D065/D066 4-96...

  • Page 284: Relay Sensor

    Do one of the following: To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear [B] to the left to decrease the pressure. To correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the pressure. 4.11.12 RELAY SENSOR 4-97 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 285: By-Pass Paper Size Detection Board

    Registration inner cover ( x 2) Not shown. This cover is directly below the by-pass tray. Connector [A] ( x 1) Ground wire [B] ( x 1) By-pass tray [C] Disconnect the by-pass tray from the pins on both sides. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-98...

  • Page 286: Reinstallation

    SP1904-001 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Minimum Size: Move the side fences to the minimum size, then execute this SP. SP1904-002 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Maximum Size: Move the side fences to the maximum size, then execute this SP. 4-99 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 287: By-Pass Tray Rollers

    Even though the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) by-pass tray and ADF are similar, the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal trays (Trays 1, 2, 3). Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-100...

  • Page 288: By-Pass Separation Roller Pressure Adjustment

    When feeding special paper, especially thick paper When the customer experiences feed problems The separation roller gear is positioned at the groove before shipping. Move the separation roller gear right to increase the pressure to correct misfeeds. 4-101 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 289: Registration Sensor

    Inner cover [A] ( x 4) Remove: Development unit ( p.4-43 "Removal ") Charge corona unit ( p.4-28) OPC drum unit ( p.4-30 "OPC Drum Removal") Paper dust removal unit [B] ( x 1, x 1) Registration sensor [C] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-102...

  • Page 290: Registration And By-Pass Unit Removal

    Remove the right upper cover. ( p.4-7 "Right Covers") Rear upper cover ( p.4-8 "Rear Covers") Disconnect the following connectors: Relay clutch connector [C] Guide plate solenoid connector [D] Guide plate sensor connector [E] By-pass tray unit connectors [F] 4-103 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 291 Make sure that the unit does not catch on any harnesses. On re-installation, make sure that no harnesses are pinched between the unit and the machine frame. You must re-install the by-pass unit with the duplex unit open. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-104...

  • Page 292: Pcbs And Hdd

    PCBs and HDD 4.12 PCBS AND HDD 4.12.1 CNT BOARD (CONTROLLER BOARD) Rear upper cover and rear lower cover ( p.4-8) Controller box cover [A] ( x 13) Open the controller box [B] ( x 6) 4-105 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 293: Reinstallation Of Cnt Board

    Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001) if possible. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-106...

  • Page 294: Nvram On The Controller

    Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible. Turn the main switch off. Then unplug the power cord. Install a New NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine. 4-107 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 295: Hdd

    3), then remove the bracket [A] ( x 2) Remove all harnesses [B] IPU [C] ( x 4, x 3 [D]) After removing screws and harnesses, pull the IPU to the left. 4.12.4 HDD Controller box cover ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)") D062/D063/D065/D066 4-108...

  • Page 296: Reinstallation

    2 [B]) Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2) from the HDD assembly [B] HDD [B] ( x 4) Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced: 4-109 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 297: Ctl-Psu

    Download the browser unit, see "Installation" of Browser Unit Type E. 4.12.5 CTL-PSU Controller box cover ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)") CTL-PSU [A] ( x 7, x 5 [B]) 4.12.6 BCU Rear upper cover and rear lower cover ( p.4-8) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-110...
  • Page 298 PCBs and HDD Open the controller box [A] ( x 3) Open the BCU bracket [A] ( x 4, all s, all Do not forget to release the clamp [B]. Lift up the BCU bracket and remove it. 4-111 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 299: Replace The Bcu

    4.12.7 CNB Open the BCU bracket ( p.4-110 "BCU"). It is not necessary to release all the clamps and harnesses. CNB [A] ( x 4, all harnesses) 4.12.8 PFB Open the controller box ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)") D062/D063/D065/D066 4-112...

  • Page 300: Drb

    PCBs and HDD PFB bracket [A] ( x 4, all 4.12.9 DRB Open the controller box ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)") Move the stay [A] slightly to the right ( x 2) DRB bracket [A] ( x 3, all 4-113 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 301: Psu

    4.12.10 PSU Open the controller box ( p.4-105 "CNT Board (Controller Board)") Power cord bracket [A] ( x 2) PSU assembly [B] ( x 5) Reinstallation of PSU Make sure the white cable and black cables are connected correctly. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-114...

  • Page 302: Adf

    Feed cover [A] ( x 2, all s, ground wire x 1). Front cover [B] ( x 2) Press down on the tabs to remove. Rear cover [C] ( x 2) Press down on the tabs to remove. 4-115 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 303: Feed Unit

    Push the feed unit slowly to the left to disengage the shaft [C] on the right, then lift it out. 4.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER Remove the feed unit ( p.4-116). Remove the pick-up roller unit [A]. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-116...
  • Page 304 Hold the feed belt holder [A] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the bushing. Do not let the springs [B] fall. Remove the feed belt [C]. When re-assembling, set the pick-up roller springs first, then follow this procedure in reverse. 4-117 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 305: Separation Roller

    Separation roller cover [A] Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover. Clip [B] ( x 1) Separation roller [C] Torque limiter clutch [D] 4.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR Open the feed cover. Remove the feed unit ( p.4-116) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-118...
  • Page 306 Remove the screw indicated above by a red arrow. Guide plate [A] ( x 3) Registration sensor bracket [B] ( x 1) Registration sensor [C] ( x 1) 4-119 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 307: Adf Control Board

    4.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD ADF rear cover ( p.4-115) ADF board [A] ( x 4, all 4.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, SEPARATION AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS Open the feed cover [A]. Guide plate [B] ( x 3) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-120...

  • Page 308: Original Length Sensors

    Width sensor guide plate [A] ( Original width sensors [B] (x 5, x 5) Separation sensor [C] ( x 1) Skew correction sensor [D] ( x 1) Interval sensor [E] ( x 1) 4.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Open the original tray [A]. 4-121 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 309: Df Position And Aps Sensors

    Original length sensor 3 – LG [E] ( x 1) 4.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSORS Open the ADF. ADF rear cover ( p.4-115) Bracket [A] ( x 1) ADF position sensor [B] ( x 1) APS sensor [C] ( x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-122...

  • Page 310: Other Adf Sensors

    Clips [A] ( x 1) Original tray [B] ( x 1) Bottom plate [C] ( x 1) Original set sensor [D] ( x 1) Feed cover sensor [E] ( x 1) Bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1) 4-123 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 311: Bottom Plate Lift Motor

    Bottom plate lift motor bracket [A] (harness x 1, x 1, x 3, timing belt x 1) Bottom plate lift motor [B] ( x 2) 4.13.12 FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-8) Feed motor bracket [A] ( x 4, x 1, belt x 1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-124...

  • Page 312: Exit Motor And Transport Motor

    Open the feed cover. ADF rear cover ( p.4-115) Bottom plate lift motor ( p.4-124) Timing belt [A] Exit/transport motor unit [B] ( x 3, x 2) Transport motor [C] ( x 2) Exit motor [D] ( x 2) 4-125 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 313: Pick-Up Roller Motor And Hp Sensor

    1) Pick-up roller HP sensor [B] ( x 1) 4.13.15 CIS UNIT Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure. Open the feed cover. Feed unit ( p.4-116) Guide plate ( p.4-118) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-126...

  • Page 314: Adf Exit Sensor

    Guide plate mylar [A] ( x 1) CIS unit [B] ( x 2, x 3) Pull out the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass. 4.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR 4-127 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 315: Adf Transport Belt Assembly

    Exit sensor [B] ( x 1) 4.13.17 ADF TRANSPORT BELT ASSEMBLY Open the ADF. Raise the ADF [A] to the vertical position. Pull off the white cover [B] (Velcro fasteners) Release the stopper pin [C] of the transport guide [D]. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-128...

  • Page 316: Reinstallation

    Important: To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque to these screws! Release the belt and make sure that the belt is loose and that the rollers do not move. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if the rollers expand and tighten the belt. 4-129 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 317 16. Insert the shaft [F] into the new belt, snap the shaft into its brackets, and push in the shaft bearings. 17. Make sure that studs on the underside of the belt [H] are aligned with the grooves in the Teflon rollers on each end of the shaft below. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-130...

  • Page 318: Reinstalling The Belt

    To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque. Remove the special tool and fit it onto the rear (see "REAR" in the above diagram). If the Teflon sleeve has been reattached at [D], remove it. Do not reattach the 4-131 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 319: Reattaching The White Cover

    With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass. Close the ADF [B] on top of the cover. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-132...

  • Page 320: Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

    After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again. Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001. Specification: 3 ± 2mm. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP modes. 4-133 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 321: Blank Margin

    SP1002-007 0±1.5 Blank Margin If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the following SP modes. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-134...
  • Page 322 Trailing edge blank margin Right edge blank margin Leading edge blank margin Left edge blank margin SP2101 Print Erase Margin SP mode Specification Leading Edge SP2101-001 2.5±2 mm Trailing Edge SP2101-002 Left edge SP2101-003 2±1.5 mm Right edge SP2101-004 4-135 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 323: Registration Buckle Adjustment

    0 mm (Buckle = 10 mm) 4.14.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustments. Registration: Platen Mode D062/D063/D065/D066 4-136...

  • Page 324: Magnification

    Specification: ±2%. Sub Scan Magnification Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary. Specification: ±0.9%. 4-137 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 325: Adf Scanning Adjustments

    Not used. Free run (Entrance mode *1, simplex, no registration) Free run (Entrance mode, simplex, continuous scanning) Motor test (feed, transport, exit motors) *1: The entrance mode disregards paper size. Skew correction is performed at the scanning roller. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-138...

  • Page 326: Adf Skew Correction

    [–30 to +24/1 mm] -30 = -5.1 mm +24 = +4.1 mm ADF Vertical Registration (Back) Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode. [–30 to +30/1 mm] -30 = -5.1 mm +30 = +5.1 mm 4-139 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 327 This feature can be switched on for all paper sizes with SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out). However, switching this feature on for all sizes reduces scanning speed slightly. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-140...

  • Page 328: Touch Screen Calibration

    If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings. 4-141 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 330: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 07/15/2009 Updated Information – SP5801 15 ~ 16 02/08/2012 Added Disconnect Network Caution.

  • Page 332: Service Program Mode

    Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine. The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. 5.1.3 TO ENTER AND EXIT THE SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Ask your supervisor how to enter and/or exit the service program mode. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 333: To Switch To The Copy Window For Test Printing

    . The small entry box on the right is activated and displays the default or the current setting below. To enter a setting Press to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous setting. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 334: Sp Mode Button Summary

    (6): SPnxxx. Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press SP1XXX. If an SP has sublevels, it is marked D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 335: Sp Mode Print (Smc Print)

    User Program Data Logging Data Self-Diagnostic Report Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.) NIB Summary (Configuration, Systemlog, Nvramlog) Capture Log Copier User Program (Copy Management Report) Scanner SP Scanner User Program (Scanner Management Report) D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 336: Resets

    Initializes all registration settings for the engine and Engine Clear copy process settings. Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information. Initializes the image file system. (IMH: Image Memory IMH Memory Clear Handler) D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 337 Clear UCS Setting settings. Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report MIRS Setting Service) settings. Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings. Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) SRM Clear settings. LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 338: Software And Setting Reset

    A confirmation message will be displayed, then press "Yes". Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only The copy/document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode. Push the User Tools key. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 339: Resetting Scanner Features Only

    The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode. Push the User Tools key. Hold down the "#" key and touch "Scanner Features" key. A message will be displayed, then press "Yes" D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 340: Test Pattern Printing

    Exit the SP mode. Test Pattern Table These patterns can be selected for SP2902-003 Test Pattern None Alternating Dot Pattern (1-dot) Alternating Dot Pattern (2-dot) Alternating Dot Pattern (4-dot) Alternating Dot Pattern (1024-dot) Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch Grid Pattern (1-dot): 1ch D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 341 Cross Stitch (Vertical) Argyle Pattern Trimming Area Full Dot Pattern Black Band (Vertical) Black Band (Horizontal) Stair Blank Image Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch (with external data) Trimming Area (with external data) Argyle Pattern (with external data) Outside Data D062/D063/D065/D066 5-10...

  • Page 342: Ipu Front/Back Test Patterns: Sp2902-001,002

    Patterns 6, 8, 9, and 11 are the best choices for testing and confirming the operation of the IPU. Test Pattern Table These patterns can be selected for both SP2902-001 and 002. Test Pattern None Vertical Line (1-dot) 5-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 343 Auto Create Vertical 1-dot Line (Main Scan) Auto Create Horizontal 1-dot Line (Sub Scan) Auto Create Vertical 2-dot Line (Main Scan) Auto Create Horizontal 2-dot Line (Sub Scan) Auto Create 1-dot Independent Dots Auto Create Grid 1-dot Line D062/D063/D065/D066 5-12...

  • Page 344: Ipu Printing Test Pattern: Sp2902-004

    Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-004. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See the table below.) Pattern Vertical Grayscale 20 Horizontal Grayscale 40 Horizontal Grayscale 20 Horizontal Grayscale 25 Caterpillar 5-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 345 Press Copy Window to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper size, etc.) Press Start twice (ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test print. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display. Switch the machine off and on. D062/D063/D065/D066 5-14...

  • Page 346: Updating The Firmware

    Before uploading data to an SD card, always confirm the write-protect switch is off. Doing the Software Update Procedure An SD card with the software downloaded to it is necessary for this procedure. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1). 5-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 347 "NEW": This is the number and other version information of the firmware on the SD card. With the selected items shown in reverse color, push the [Update] button or the [#] key on the operation panel to start the update. After you push [Update]: D062/D063/D065/D066 5-16...
  • Page 348 [Verify] button. This is to check that the modules were updated correctly. If you see "Verify Error" in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the procedure again for the module shown in the bottom bar. 5-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 349: Errors During Firmware Update

    SD card. No HDD available for stamp HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks. data download Data incorrect for continuous Install the SD card with the remaining data download necessary for the download, then re-start the D062/D063/D065/D066 5-18...

  • Page 350: Updating The Lcdc For The Operation Panel

    Get the correct failed data then install again. Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel Use this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board). Turn the copier main switch off. Put the SD card into slot 2. 5-19 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 351: Downloading Stamp Data

    2) Perform the NVRAM Data Upload (to the SD Card) according to the procedure below. 3) Perform the Memory Clear (SP5801-001 or 002). 4) Perform the NVRAM Data Download (from the SD Card) according to the procedure below. 5) Manually input the data listed above. D062/D063/D065/D066 5-20...

  • Page 352: Uploading Content Of Nvram To An Sd Card

    This procedure does not download the C/O, P/O Count data to the NVRAM: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will not complete correctly. 5-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 353: Service Program Mode Tables

    Service Program Mode Tables 5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 5.5.1 SP TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: System SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables D062/D063/D065/D066 5-22...

  • Page 354: Input/Output Check

    Input/Output Check 5.6 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK See "Appendices" for the following information: Input/Output Check 5-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 355: Using The Debug Log

    The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function is switched on and a target is selected. To Switch Debug Log On To enter the SP mode, press together (5s), release, then press [#Enter]. Select SP5857. SP5857 >> Save Debug Log Push [#Enter]. SP5857-001 On/Off Push [#Enter]. <On/Off> *OFF D062/D063/D065/D066 5-24...

  • Page 356: To Select The Target For The Debug Log File

    To Select the Target for the Debug Log File You can select either the HDD (default) or the SD card as the target. This procedure shows you how to select the SD card. Push SP587-002 Target Push [#Enter]. <Target> *2:HDD Push <Target> 5-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 357: To Select Events

    Here is a list of the events that you can select. Any number of events can be selected. SP No. Name What It Does Saves error data when an engine-related SP5858-001 EngineSC Error SC code occurs. Saves error data when a SP5858-002 SystemSC Error controller-related SC Code occurs. D062/D063/D065/D066 5-26...
  • Page 358 Example 1: To Select Items 001, 002, or 004 Push to select 001, 002, or 003. This example shows the selection of 001. SP5858-001 EngineSC Error Push [#Enter]. <EngineSC Error> *OFF Push <EngineSC Error> Push [#Enter]. <EngineSC Error> Push [Esc]. SP5858-001 EngineSC Error 5-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 359 Push [#Enter] to toggle the on the number display in the 2nd line. 0000000 Push to display "2". 0000000 Push [#Enter] to enter the "2" in the line above. 0000002 Push to move the cursor to the next digit. D062/D063/D065/D066 5-28...

  • Page 360: To Select One Or More Memory Modules For Recording In The Debug Log File

    10. Do the next procedure to select one or more memory modules for the debug error data recording. To select one or more memory modules for recording in the debug log file Select SP5859. SP5859 >> LogSaveKey No. Push [#Enter]. SP5859 Key 1 5-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 361 Refer to the table below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. (The acronyms in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 Key No. Printer 2222 (SCS) 2223 (SRM) 256 (IMH) D062/D063/D065/D066 5-30...
  • Page 362 GW Print Service GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module Image Memory Handler Memory Control Service Network Control Service Net File Application Printer Design Language Print Server System Control Service System Resource Management WebDB Web Document Box (Document Server) 5-31 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 363: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (HDD for SD (4MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.

  • Page 364: Sp5857-017: Make Sd Log File

    SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-017). 5-33 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 365: Dip Switch Tables

    Region Selection Japan: 6, 7, 8/ OFF, OFF, OFF Region Selection NA (115V): 6, 7, 8/ ON, OFF, OFF Region Selection EU (220/240V): 6, 7, 8/ OFF, ON, OFF DFU: Design, Factory Use only. Do not change these settings. D062/D063/D065/D066 5-34...

  • Page 366: Troubleshooting

    TROUBLESHOOTING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 11/17/2011 Recovery methods...

  • Page 368: Service Call Conditions

    Service Call Conditions 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For "Service Call Conditions" information, see "Appendices". D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 369: Important Sp Codes

    Execute to display the following information SP7403 Status of Issued SC about the most recently issued SC: 1) Source file name, 2) SC number, 3) Result For more information about these and other SP codes, see “Service Tables”. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 370: Jam Detection

    Visually check the by-pass tray pick-up, feed, and separation rollers. If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently used, replace the rollers in the by-pass tray. For more details, see Replacement and Adjustment - By-Pass Tray Rollers. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 371 SP7504 8 SP7504 9 SP7504 10 SP7504 11 Tray 1 Gear [A] Gear [B] Tray 2 Gear [A] Gear [B] Tray 3 Gear [A] Gear [B] Tray 4 Gear [A] Gear [B] Clean the shafts and replace the necessary gears. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 372 If a replacement gear is not available, do this as a temporary procedure: Remove the paper feed unit. Remove the gear. Clean the gear shaft and inside the gear. Attach the gear. Install the paper feed unit. D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 373: Program Download

    6.4.2 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES Display Details Recovery Reboot after card Controller ROM update error 1 Use the correct insert E01 card When the update break data is Module ID Card No. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 374 Error occurs when writing to the E05 Power off/on Replace RAM device. DIMM Replace controller board Controller ROM update error 6 Turn the machine Download Error power off/on. Set controller CPU clock error. Power off/on DIPSW-1 to ON to D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 375 Replace controller defective. board System error 4 Turn the machine off/on and re-try Set DIP SW 1 to SC991 “Selfupdate” does not execute. ON and re-try Software defective. Replace the controller board Download Error System error 5 Turn the machine D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 376 Use the correct No Valid Data E34 Specification error. DOM card set in card EXP machine, or vice versa. Download dysfunction 6 Use the correct No Valid Data E35 Wrong model. The inserted card is card for another model. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 377 Card No. xx/xx Download result failure 5 Turn the machine power off/on. Download Error Set controller The data targeted for the write DIPSW-1 to ON to Module ID Card No. operation could not be accessed. force the machine to write D062/D063/D065/D066 6-10...
  • Page 378 Try again with the (no display) ROM update is corrupted; it failed a correct data. SUM check due to its abnormal length. Download result failure 6 Do the download (no display) The previous download in progress procedure again. was cancelled. 6-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 379: Timing Charts

    Vertical transport sensor ON > Vertical transport sensor does not switch OFF at the (4): correct time. (5): Lower relay motor ON> Relay sensor does not switch ON at the correct time. Vertical transport sensor OFF > Relay sensor does not switch OFF at the correct (6): time. D062/D063/D065/D066 6-12...

  • Page 380: Transport, Inverter, Feed Out: Face-Down

    From the registration sensor to the fusing unit exit, jam detection is the same as (1): face-up feed out. Exit unit entrance sensor ON > Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the (2): correct time. (3): Registration sensor OFF > Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the 6-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 381: Duplex Transport

    Duplex transport sensor 1 ON> Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch on at the (3): correct time. Duplex entrance sensor ON > Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch OFF at (4): the correct time. (5): Duplex transport sensor 2 ON > Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch ON at D062/D063/D065/D066 6-14...
  • Page 382 Duplex transport sensor 2 OFF > Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch OFF at (6): the correct time. Duplex transport sensor 3 ON > Relay sensor does not switch on at the correct (7): time. 6-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 383: Other Problems

    6.6.2 COMMON PROBLEMS Problem Check Inspect, Clean, Replace Dirty Copies Fusing Unit Pressure roller Jam – Fusing Unit Fusing Unit Hot roller Jam – Fusing Unit Fusing Unit Hot roller strippers Jam – Original Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers D062/D063/D065/D066 6-16...
  • Page 384 Charge corona wire, charge corona grid, SC300 ~ SC306 Around the Drum charge corona wire cleaner. Skew – Original Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers Toner on transfer belt Transfer Belt Unit Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade Wrinkling Fusing Unit Pressure roller 6-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 386: Energy Saving

    ENERGY SAVING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 388: Energy Save

    Panel off timer (10 sec – 240 min): Panel Off Mode. Default setting: 10 sec. Energy saver timer (1 – 240 min): Low Power Mode. Default setting: 1 minute Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode Default settings: D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 389: Return To Stand-By Mode

    D066: 30 sec. Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. D062/D063: Max 30 sec. D065: Max 60 sec. D066: Max 300 sec. Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept. If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.

  • Page 390: Energy Save Effectiveness

    Start Time Power Date Consumption Machine Time: Time: Difference Consumptio (W): Status (min.) (min.) Data: a Data: b Data: c (Data:b - (Data:a x Data: c) Data:d) (min.) (Wmin.) Data: d Data: e 1081.8 001: 21089.0 21386.0 297.0 321294.6 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 391 Off mode 508776. 520377. mode Time 11601.0 81207.0 Total Time of Data: d (min.) 19762.0 Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour) 329.37 Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.) 1947781.60 Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH) 32.46 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 392: Paper Save

    1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2. Combine mode: Reduce paper volume in half! 3. Duplex + Combine: Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4! D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 393 Sheets used SP8501-001 SP8411-001 If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously. The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex/combine jobs. D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 394 2 in 1 mode: Paper Simplex Sheet Duplex Total counter Duplex counter Originals Saved used Sheets used SP8501-001 SP8421-004 Duplex + 2 in 1 mode: Paper Simplex Sheet Duplex Total counter Duplex counter Originals Saved used Sheets used SP8501-001 SP8421-005 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 395 Paper Save Paper Simplex Sheet Duplex Total counter Duplex counter Originals Saved used Sheets used SP8501-001 SP8421-005 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 396 D062/D063/D065/D066 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 398: Type

    D062/D063/D065/D066 APPENDICES TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........ 1-1 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............1-1 1.1.1 COPIER .................... 1-1 Engine ....................1-1 ADF ...................... 1-3 Power Consumption ................1-4 Noise Emission..................1-5 1.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT................1-8 1.2.1 A3/11" X 17" TRAY TYPE 9001 (D482) ..........1-8 1.2.2 RT43 (A4 LCT) (B473) ..............
  • Page 399 SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems....3-21 SC600: Data Communication ............. 3-30 SC700: Peripherals ................3-36 SC800: Overall System ..............3-53 SC900: Miscellaneous................ 3-66 3.1.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT....3-72 3.1.5 JAM CODES ................... 3-78 D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 400 4.2.6 FINISHER 1 OUTPUT CHECK: SP6124 ........4-261 4.2.7 FINISHER 2 INPUT CHECK: SP6122 .......... 4-263 4.2.8 FINISHER 2 OUTPUT CHECK: SP6124 ........4-265 4.2.9 FINISHER 3 INPUT CHECK: SP6309 .......... 4-266 4.2.10 FINISHER 3 OUTPUT CHECK: SP6310......... 4-267 SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 402: Appendix: General Specifications

    APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 404 (14 to 58 lb.) 7 reduction ratios, 5 enlargement ratios Reproduction Ratios Metric (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25 Inch (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25 SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 405 D065 3.5 s D066 3.3 s D062/D063: Less than 30 seconds D065: Less than 60 seconds D066: Less than 300 seconds Warm-up Time From power on at 23 C (73.4 Less than 30 sec. at return from power off mode...

  • Page 406: Adf

    General Specifications D062/D063: Max. 1.8 kW D065/D066: Max. 1.8 kW Power Consumption Full System D062/D063: Max. 1.9 kW D065: Max. 1.95 kW D066: Max. 1.9 kW Energy Start Implemented Memory 512 MB / 1.5GB (Copy Printer model) HDD Capacity 160 GB...

  • Page 407: Power Consumption

    NA: 120V Model Mainframe Only Full System D062/D063: Approx. 1.41 kW D062/D063: Approx. 1.43 kW Warm-up D065: Approx. 1.40 kW D065: Approx. 1.42 kW D066: Approx. 1.71 kW D066: Approx. 1.73 kW D062/D063: Approx. 294 kW D062/D063: Approx. 317 kW Stand-by D065: Approx.

  • Page 408: Noise Emission

    EU: 220V to 240V Model Mainframe Only Full System D062/D063: Approx. 1.47 kW D062/D063: Approx. 1.50 kW Warm-up D065: Approx. 1.51 kW D065: Approx. 1.53 kW D066: Approx. 1.71 kW D066: Approx. 1.73 kW D062/D063: Approx. 279 kW D062/D063: Approx. 302 kW Stand-by D065: Approx.
  • Page 409 General Specifications Noise Emission: Sound Pressure Level (NA) D062 D063 D065 D066 Mainframe Only Less than 35.8 Less than 35.9 Less than 37.7 Less than 38.0 Standby dB (A) dB (A) dB (A) dB (A) Less than 54.5 Less than 57.6 Less than 58.5...
  • Page 410 General Specifications Noise Emission: Sound Pressure Level (EU) D062 D063 D065 D066 Mainframe Only Less than 35.8 Less than 35.9 Less than 37.7 Less than 38.0 Standby dB (A) dB (A) dB (A) dB (A) Less than 54.5 Less than 57.6 Less than 58.5...

  • Page 411: Optional Equipment

    Dimensions (W x D x H) 314 x 458 x 659 mm (12.4" x 18.1" x 25.9") Weight 20.0 kg (44 lb.) *1: In platen mode, APS (Auto Paper Select) with the original length and original width sensors are not used. D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...

  • Page 412: Finisher Sr4050 (3K Finisher D460)

    Stapling Stack Size A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (Max. 50 sheets) A3 to B5 Stapling Paper Size 11" x 17" to 8.5" x 11" Stapling Paper Weight 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 20 lb) SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 413: Punch Unit Type 1075 (B531)

    2/3-hole (North America) Punch Hole Positions 2/4-hole (Europe) Punch Paper Size A5 to A3 SEF, 11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5" SEF 2-Hole (NA) A5 to A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF, 5.5" x 8.5" LEF D062/D063/D065/D066 1-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 414 The DIP switches of these punch units do not need to be changed at installation, or adjusted for operation. DIP SW Settings Punch Unit Unit No. 2/3-Hole (NA) B531-17 2/4-Hole (EUR/A) B531-27 0: OFF, 1: ON SM Appendix 1-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 415: Output Jogger Unit Type 1075 (B513)

    Less than 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.) Dimensions (W x D x H) 125 mm x 450 mm x 100 mm (5" x 17.7" x 4") Power Supply DC 24 V, DC 5V (From Finisher) Power Consumption 24 W D062/D063/D065/D066 1-12 SM Appendix...

  • Page 416: Lg Size Tray Type 1075 (B474)

    A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF Paper Size 5.5"x8.5"-11"x17"SEF, 12"x18" SEF Paper 52 g/m²-163 g/m² Weight 14 lb Bond- 43 lb Bond / 90 lb Index / 60 lb Cover Shift Tray Stack 3,000 A4 LEF, 1/2" x11" LEF SM Appendix 1-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 417: Stapler

    A4 LEF + A3 SEF, Capacity B5 LEF + B4 SEF, Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets " x11" LEF + 11" x17" Staple Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge Replenishment Stapled Stack Paper Size Pages/Set Sets D062/D063/D065/D066 1-14 SM Appendix...

  • Page 418: Finisher Sr4040 (2K Booklet Finisher D373)

    Power Less than 96 W Consumption Noise Less than 75 db Configuration Console type attached base-unit Power Source From base-unit Stack 250 sheets A4, 8.5"x11" or smaller Proof Tray Capacity* 50 sheets B4, 8.5"x14 or larger SM Appendix 1-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 419: Stapler

    " x 11" or smaller Same Paper Size Capacity* 30 sheets B4, 8 " x 14" or larger A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets B4 SEF, 8 "x11" LEF & 11" x17" SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 1-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 420 B5 LEF + B4 Mixed Size 2-30 pages 8.5"x11" LEF + 11" x17" SEF A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF 2-5 pages Booklet Staple 8.5"x11" SEF, 6-10 pages Capacity 8.5"x14" SEF, 11-15 pages 11"x17" SEF 12"x18" SEF SM Appendix 1-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 421: D373/D374 Paper Specifications

    — — 12" x 18" — — 11" x 17" — " x 14" — " x 11" — " x 11" " x 8 " — — — " x 8 " — — — D062/D063/D065/D066 1-18 SM Appendix...

  • Page 422: Punch Unit Type 3260 (B702)

    SEF A5 - A3, 5 " x 8 " to 11" x 17" EU 2-hole A5 to A4, 5 " x 8 ", 8 " x 11" SEF A3, B4, 11"x17" EU 4-hole A4, B5, 8 " x 11" SM Appendix 1-19 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 423: 9-Bin Mailbox (B762)

    500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.6 x 23.6 in.) Weight Less than 12 Kg (26.4 lb.) Power Consumption Less than 43 W Noise Less than 65 db Stack Capability* 200 Sheets Paper Size A5-A3, 5 " x 8 " - 11" x 17" D062/D063/D065/D066 1-20 SM Appendix...

  • Page 424: Multi-Folding Unit Fd5000 (D454)

    100 to 700 mm/s Folding 270 to 700 mm/s Straight-Through Feed Size Postcard to 13x19.2" Used paper: A3, A4, B4, B5 Type OHP: A4, B5 Tap paper: A4 LEF, LT LEF Folding Methods 6 (FM1 to FM6) SM Appendix 1-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 425 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, B5, LT 12x18", 12.6x18.5", 12.6x19.2", 13x18", 13x19", 13x19.2", 226x310 mm, 310x432 mm, SRA3, SRA4, 8-kai A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, B5, 12x18", 8-kai Paper Weights (Folding) 64 to 105 g/m Multiple Folding Not allowed D062/D063/D065/D066 1-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 426 50 mm at 100 mm/sec. 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 420 mm long) 250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long) Power Supply AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A SM Appendix 1-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 427: Tray Capacity

    The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables: Folding Methods (FM1 to FM6) Paper size Paper weight Folding Mode FM1 Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy) Size 64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF B4 SEF LG SEF A4 SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 1-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 428 Folding Mode FM2 Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy) Size 64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m 13x19.2" 13x19" 12.6x19.2" 12.6x18.5" 13x18" SRA3 (320x450 mm) SRA4 (225x320 mm) 226x310 mm 310x432 mm 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF B4 SEF SM Appendix 1-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 429 LT SEF B5 SEF Folding Mode FM3 Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy) Size 64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF B4 SEF LG SEF A4 SEF LT SEF B5 SEF Folding Mode FM4 D062/D063/D065/D066 1-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 430 64 to 80 g/m 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF B4 SEF LG SEF A4 SEF LT SEF B5 SEF Folding Mode FM5 Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy) Size 64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF SM Appendix 1-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 431 A4 SEF LT SEF B5 SEF Folding Mode FM6 Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy) Size 64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m 8-kai 12x18" A3 SEF B4 SEF LG SEF A4 SEF LT SEF B5 SEF SM Appendix 1-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 432: Appendix: Pm Tables

    APPENDIX: PM TABLES APPENDIX 2 PM TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 434: Main Machine

    Scanner Guide Rails scanner guide rails with Launa Oil. Toner Shield Glass Optics cloth Reflector Optics cloth Dust Filters Blower brush Around the Drum 300K 450K 600K Exp. Note Charge Corona Grid Charge Corona Wire Alcohol cloth SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 435 Quenching Lamp Dry cloth Transfer Entrance Stay Dry cloth Ozone Filter (Rear) 4,500 Ozone Filter (Front) Cleaning Filter Cleaning Side Seal Dry cloth Cleaning Entrance Seal Dry cloth Dry cloth Toner Collection Bottle 1,500 Toner Pan Dry cloth D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...

  • Page 436: Development Unit

    Development Unit Dry cloth. Paddle Roller Shaft Blower brush, dry cloth. Used Toner Separation Unit Paper Feed 300K 600K 1000K Exp. Note Registration Rollers Alcohol Relay Rollers Alcohol Paper Dust Mylar Dry cloth SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 437: Transfer Belt Unit

    Transfer Belt Unit 300K 450K 600K AN Exp. Note Transfer Belt Use dry cloth to clean transfer belt. Always Transfer Roller Cleaning replace transfer belt and Blade transfer roller cleaning blade together. D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...

  • Page 438: Fusing Unit And Paper Exit

    AN Exp. Note Fusing Entrance Guide Dry cloth Plate Fusing Exit Guide Plate Dry cloth Fusing Lamps Hot Roller Hot Roller Bearings Pressure Roller Pressure Roller Bearings Pressure Cleaning Roller Replace as a set. Pressure Cleaning Roller Bearings SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 439: Duplex

    450K 600K AN Exp. Note Entrance Sensor Blower brush Inverter Exit Rollers Alcohol Reverse Trigger Rollers Dry cloth Transport Rollers Dry cloth Inverter Entrance Roller Dry cloth Entrance Anti-Static Dry cloth Brush Reverse Junction Gate Dry cloth D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...

  • Page 440: Adf

    White Platen Roller Pre-Scanning Roller Scanning Roller Exit Roller 2.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES RT43 (A4 LCT) (B473) 300K 450K 1000K Exp. Note Pick-up Roller 1000 Always replace these rollers as a set. The target service life Feed Roller 1000 SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 441: Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260 (B704)

    Damp clean cloth. Idle Rollers Damp clean cloth. Discharge Brush Damp clean cloth. Sensors Blower brush. Finisher SR4050 (3K Finisher D460) 350K 700K 1050K Exp. Note Drive rollers Alcohol Idle rollers Discharge brush Bushings Lubricate with silicone oil if D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...

  • Page 442: Finisher Sr4030 (D374)/ Sr4040 (D373)

    SP5990. Replace the unit if the staple count is 200K. Punch Unit Type 3260 (B702) for Finisher SR4030 (D374)/ SR4040 (D373) 2400K 3000K 4000K Note Punch Waste Hopper Remove and empty Punch Unit Replace after 1000k punches. SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 443: Multi-Folding Unit Fd5000 (D454)

    This is a list of the PM related SP codes. For details, refer to "Service Tables" in the "Appendices". SP7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM. SP7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM count. D062/D063/D065/D066 2-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 444 APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS APPENDIX 3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 11/18/2011 SC conditions 02/03/2011 SC230 03/12/2010 Corrected SC 625 10/01/2009 Added SC 995 09/23/2009 Finisher D460 Jam Codes...

  • Page 446: Appendix: Service Call Conditions

    SCs that disable only the features that use the Turn the main power switch defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they off/on. are displayed on the operation panel only when SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 447: Sc Code Descriptions

    At trigger on, the lamp was not detected on. SBU board defective SIOB board defective IPU board defective BCU board defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Lamp stabilizer harness damaged, disconnected Standard white plate dirty, disconnected or has condensation DF white belt dirty D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 448 Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley or carriage installed incorrectly. Black level detection error The black level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. Harness between SBU – SIOB is disconnected. Harness between SIOB – BCU is disconnected. Defective SBU Defective BCU SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 449 SBU auto gain error The white level cannot be adjusted to the first target level within the target during auto gain control. SBU board defective SIOB board defective IPU board defective BCU board defective Scanner motor defective D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 450 The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the BICU is detected. Defective BICU Defective connection between BICU and SBU Check the connection between BICU and SBU. Replace the BICU. The machine detects an error during an access to the Ri. SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 451 Harness between the SIOB – PSU is disconnected Scanner Fan Error: Right Side The fan located on the right side of the exposure unit is not rotating. Check the fan connections Fan defective Check SBU connection SBU defective D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 452 Make sure CN210 and CN220 are connected firmly. Turn on the machine. CIS white level error The shading data peak detected from the CIS is abnormal. CIS defective Make sure CN210 and CN220 are connected firmly. Replace the CIS. SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 453: Sc200: Exposure

    The polygon mirror motor PCB connector is loose, broken, or defective Polygon mirror motor PCB defective Polygon mirror motor defective IPU defective Polygon mirror motor error 2: Timeout at OFF The polygon mirror motor did not leave "Ready" within 3 sec. after the motor D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 454 Note: The unit polls for the signal every 50 ms. This SC is issued after the 10th attempt fails to detect the signal. Laser synchronization board connector loose, broken, defective Laser synchronization detection board is not installed correctly (out of SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 455 The FGATE off signal still assert within 1 second after the machine finishes the writing. The FGATE off signal does not assert when the machine is ready for the next job. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-10 SM Appendix...

  • Page 456: Sc300: Image Development System (1)

    Poor charge corona unit connection Charge grid circuit open When high voltage goes to the corona grid, feedback voltage is more than the set value 9 times. This feedback voltage is used to update PWM for output control. SM Appendix 3-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 457 (–100V, –800V) are applied to the drum. Potential sensor defective Potential sensor harness disconnected Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected IOB defective OPC connector defective Development power pack defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 458 During drum potential sensor calibration when adjusting the drum potential (VH) for LD power adjustment, the first time the VH pattern is made, the drum potential sensor detects that VH is more than 500V: VH > –500 + VL + 130 V SM Appendix 3-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 459 During drum potential sensor calibration, when -800V is applied to the drum, the output value is out of the prescribed range. Potential sensor defective Potential sensor harness disconnected Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected IOB defective OPC connector defective Development power pack defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 460 TD sensor defective TD sensor harness disconnected TD sensor connector disconnected or defective IOB defective Toner bottle motor defective Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor. SM Appendix 3-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 461 This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD sensor has been achieved. Switching the machine off and on will cancel the SC display, but does not release ID sensor toner supply. TD sensor defective TD sensor harness disconnected TD sensor connector disconnected or defective IOB defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 462 The ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V and the PWM signal input to the ID sensor is 0 when checking the ID sensor pattern. ID sensor defective ID sensor harness disconnected ID sensor connector defective IOB defective ID sensor pattern not written correctly Incorrect image density SM Appendix 3-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 463 Vsg greater than or equal to 4.0V when the minimum PWM input (0) is applied to the ID sensor. ID sensor defective ID sensor harness disconnected ID sensor connector defective IOB defective ID sensor pattern not written correctly Incorrect image density Charge power pack defective ID sensor dirty D062/D063/D065/D066 3-18 SM Appendix...

  • Page 464: Sc400: Image Development (2)

    Charge corona wire dirty, broken SC400: Image Development (2) Transfer output abnormal When the transfer is output, the feedback voltage remains higher than 4V for 60 ms. Transfer power pack defective Transfer current terminal, transfer power pack disconnected, damaged connector SM Appendix 3-19 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 465 If this SC is returned on a machine in the field, inspect the toner supply unit coil. If the gear is not damaged replace the coil. If the gear is damaged, the gear shaft is probably deformed, so replace the entire unit. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-20 SM Appendix...

  • Page 466: Sc500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, And Fusing Systems

    Paper or other obstacle trapped the bottom plate. between tray and motor When the tray lowers, the Pick-up solenoid disconnected, blocked by an obstacle tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 s. Too much paper loaded in tray SM Appendix 3-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 467 3 times. If the operator turns the machine off/on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray, the 3-count is reset. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 468 At first, the machine displays a Tray overload detected when message asking the operator to the tray is set. reset the tray. This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and SM Appendix 3-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 469 Pick-up solenoid defective or 18 s. After lift begins, the upper disconnected limit sensor does not switch Paper end sensor defective on before the pick-up solenoid switches on. The paper end sensor switches on during lift and D062/D063/D065/D066 3-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 470 Paper or other obstacle has jammed the home position, the jogger HP mechanism sensor does not turn on even if Sensor connector disconnected or the jogger fence motor has defective moved the jogger fence 153.5 Sensor defective SM Appendix 3-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 471 Fusing lamp disconnected roller does not reach the 100°C control temperature Thermistor warped, out of position within 25 s. Thermostat not operating 5 sec. after temperature rise started, temperature remained below 21°C after 5 D062/D063/D065/D066 3-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 472 11 samplings (1.8 s. duration) Fusing lamp disconnected while the hot roller was not rotating. Zero cross signal malfunction One of the following conditions is detected 10 times: Noise on the AC power line When the main switch is on, SM Appendix 3-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 473 The reload temperature with 56 seconds after the start of the fusing temperature control cycle. Fusing thermistor error 3 The end thermistor (contact type) PSU defective was at 240°C (464°F) for more IOB control board defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 474 Motor lock because of too much During copying, the HP sensor load could not detect the actuator, Motor driver defective tried again 3 times and could not HP sensor defective, disconnected, detect. connector defective, harness damaged SM Appendix 3-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 475: Sc600: Data Communication

    MBX, the BICU received Serial line connection unstable a break (Low) signal from the External noise on the line finisher. BICU/Tray 1 to 4 communication/timeout error After 1 data frame is sent to the Serial line connection unstable D062/D063/D065/D066 3-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 476 External noise on the line not received after 3 retries. BICU, LCT communication/break reception error During communication with the Serial line connection unstable LCT, the BICU received a break External noise on the line (Low) signal. SM Appendix 3-31 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 477 Fan folder main control unit connector loose, broken, defective Fan folder main control unit defective Charge Unit Device Error 1 Japan Only Charge Unit Device Error 2 Japan Only Charge Unit Device Error 3 Japan Only Charge Unit Device Error 4 Japan Only D062/D063/D065/D066 3-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 478 RAPI protocol. The frame was sent 3 times at 100 ms intervals. This SC was issued after the 3rd attempt failed. Examine the connection between the controller and the engine board. Replace the engine board if the error is frequent. SM Appendix 3-33 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 479 Use SP5985 1 and set the NIC to "0" (Disable) to the network enable switch disable the network board. and Cumin-M were enabled at the same time. The modem board could Replace the modem board. not enable the NIB. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 480 Controller board defective Mother board defective Software error; switch off/on, if that fails, change the engine firmware PSU-E or PSU-C defective Illegal Engine Board An illegal engine board was detected by the firmware at power on. Replace BICU SM Appendix 3-35 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 481: Sc700: Peripherals

    The bottom plate position sensor does not detect the position of the plate after the lift motor switches on and raises the bottom plate. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-36 SM Appendix...
  • Page 482 Staple hammer HP sensor loose, The staple hammer motor did broken, defective not return to the home position Electrical overload on the stapler within the prescribed time (340 drive PCB elect ms). Staple hammer motor defective Finisher main board defective SM Appendix 3-37 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 483 Motor harness disconnected, loose, within the prescribed time after defective the retraction motor switches on. Motor defective The 1st detection failure issues Motor overload a jam error, and the 2nd failure HP defective issues this SC code. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-38 SM Appendix...
  • Page 484 Front motor disconnected, defective operation within the specified Front motor overloaded due to time. The 1st detection failure obstruction issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. SM Appendix 3-39 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 485 If the motor is operating Front stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective Front stack plate HP sensor defective If the motor is not operating: Motor blocked by an obstruction Motor harness loose, broken, defective Motor defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 486 Rear stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective Rear stack plate HP sensor defective If the motor is not operating: Motor blocked by an obstruction Motor harness loose, broken, defective Motor defective Booklet finisher main board defective SM Appendix 3-41 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 487 Half-turn sensor 1, 2 harnesses loose, broken, defective One of the half-turn sensors is defective If the motor is not operating: Motor blocked by an obstruction Motor harness loose, broken, defective Motor defective Finisher main board defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 488 Paper position sensor slide motor error Occurs during operation of the Motor harness disconnected, loose, punch unit. The 1st detection defective failure issues a jam error, and the Motor defective 2nd failure issues this SC code. SM Appendix 3-43 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 489 Bottom plate position sensor, the plate at the specified time (3 disconnected, defective Bottom plate HP sensor After the motor starts to lower the disconnected, defective bottom plate, the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the bottom plate. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 490 Bottom fence HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective Bottom fence HP sensor defective If the jogger bottom fence motor is not operating: Motor blocked by an obstruction Motor harness loose, broken, defective Motor defective Finisher main board defective SM Appendix 3-45 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 491 2nd occurrence causes this SC code. 778-4 Entrance JG HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Entrance JG motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Sensor defective Motor or motor drive board defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 492 Upper stopper motor disconnected, The upper stopper was not defective detected at the home position Upper stopper motor overloaded after the motor remained on long due to obstruction enough to move it 128.7 mm. Upper stopper HP sensor SM Appendix 3-47 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 493 The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor. 783-3 Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Motor or motor drive board defective 2nd Fold Motor Error Multi Folder (D454) 783-4 The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 494 2nd occurrence causes this SC code. 783-8 Dynamic roller HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Dynamic roller lift motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Sensor defective Motor or motor drive board defective SM Appendix 3-49 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 495 2nd occurrence causes this SC code. 783-11 Jogger fence HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Jogger fence motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective Sensor defective Motor or motor drive board defective D062/D063/D065/D066 3-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 496 The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd 783-14 occurrence causes this SC code. FM6 pawl HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective FM6 pawl motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective SM Appendix 3-51 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 497 Mylar disconnected. Z-fold EEPROM error The write operation to the Z-folding EEPROM EEPROM defective failed after 2 attempts Z-fold top tray exit motor error The motor driver detects an Motor overcurrent error. Motor driver overheat D062/D063/D065/D066 3-52 SM Appendix...

  • Page 498: Sc800: Overall System

    OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted. Error Codes Code Meaning 0x0000 0000 BIOS boot error 0x0000 0001 Primary boot start load error SM Appendix 3-53 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 499 Optional board defective messages was displayed on the Replace controller firmware operation panel. 0x5032 HAIC-P2 error 0x5245 Link-up fail 0x5355 L2 Status Time Out 0x696e gwinit died Vm_pageout: VM is 0x766d full 554C USB loader defect Other D062/D063/D065/D066 3-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 500 ASIC is not detected. For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. SM Appendix 3-55 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 501 Controller defective diagnostic command is issued to the HDDs. Error returned from HDD in response to the self-diagnostic command, 3014 HDD defective Mandolin could not be located due to a read/write error at the HDD register. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-56 SM Appendix...
  • Page 502 For more details about SC 833, SC834 and other errors, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the SMC report. SM Appendix 3-57 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 503 Controller defective 5101 engine mother board gave an Mother board defective error. Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock Replace the controller board generator via the I2C bus. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 504 Wireless LAN card defective Wireless card connection not tight Wireless LAN Error 4 An error is detected for the wireless LAN board (802.11b or Bluetooth). Wireless LAN card board defective. PCI connector loose (External controller interface board). SM Appendix 3-59 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 505 See SC991 below. Data Encryption Error 2 These are errors of the HDD Data Encryption Option D377. Data conversion was attempted with no HDD unit 8 HDD Check Error present. Confirm that HDD unit installed correctly D062/D063/D065/D066 3-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 506 Hard disk power connector loose One of the hard disks is defective Controller defective Bad sector overflow There more 100 bad sectors in HDD defective image storage area of the HDD. Format HDD with SP4911-2 SM Appendix 3-61 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 507 Data transfer did HDD defective not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD. HDD access error HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition HDD defective. other than those for SC863, 864. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-62 SM Appendix...
  • Page 508 SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective An error occurred while an SD Controller board defective card was used. Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1. SM Appendix 3-63 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 509 An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on, or power was turned of while the machine used the HDD. Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD – Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD. Replace the HDD. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-64 SM Appendix...
  • Page 510 Data DOS card has been removed from Overwrite Security function, even the SD card slot. though it has been set up and DOS card is damaged. Note: enabled. If the SD card has been removed (or SM Appendix 3-65 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 511: Sc900: Miscellaneous

    NVRAM disturbed unexpectedly. The total counter contains data NVRAM defective that is not a number. NVRAM data corrupted. Mechanical total counter error Mechanical total counter defective The mechanical counter is not Mechanical total counter connector connected. not connected D062/D063/D065/D066 3-66 SM Appendix...
  • Page 512 NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder Before initializing the NetFile partition on the HDD please inform the client that: Received faxes on the delivery server will be lost All captured documents will be lost SM Appendix 3-67 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 513 FLUTE serial driver was detected, of BREAK signal from the other station was detected. Power outage at the EFI controller. EFI controller was rebooted. Connection to EFI controller loose. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-68 SM Appendix...
  • Page 514 The settings required for image processing using the printer Software defective controller are not sent from the IPU. Memory setting error The settings that are required for image processing using the Software defective memory are not sent from the IPU. SM Appendix 3-69 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 515 An unexpected operation was encountered by the software. Software crash, reboot the machine If the HDDs have just been replaced, be sure to download the stamp data (SP 5853). With SP5990 004(SMC Report – Logging Data), print the most recent information for SC990. D062/D063/D065/D066 3-70 SM Appendix...
  • Page 516 This can occur if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel. No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine. SM Appendix 3-71 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 517: Additional Sc Codes Printed In Smc Report

    Unexpected error in CPU 0001 error device: TLB miss (load) exception error 0002 Controller board defective Boot monitor or TLB miss (store) exception error 0003 self-diagnostic program 0004 Read address exception error corrupted 0005 Write address exception error D062/D063/D065/D066 3-72 SM Appendix...
  • Page 518 0605 System call exception error Controller board defective 0606 Break point exception error 0607 Illegal command exception error 060A Allocation 0 mask exception error CPU device error ASIC device error 060B Allocation 1 mask exception error SM Appendix 3-73 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 519 0804 TLB global error 0807 UTLB miss error CPU device defective (controller board defective) 0808 TLB read miss error 0809 TLB write miss error 080A TLB mode file error 4002 Single-precision calculation error CPU error (controller D062/D063/D065/D066 3-74 SM Appendix...
  • Page 520 RAM DIMM defective Software storage error 0101 Boost trap code (CODE) error (re-install software) Controller board defective 0104 ROM FS error ROM device error Forgery prevention chip defective 0105 Forgery prevention error Forgery prevention chip error SM Appendix 3-75 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 521 Not used. error IEEE802 11b card error Not used. IEEE802 11b card Not used. connection board error Address book data error The address book in the hard disk is accessed. An error is detected in the D062/D063/D065/D066 3-76 SM Appendix...
  • Page 522 The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not Defective hardware normally read. Data corruption Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from Defective software the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software SM Appendix 3-77 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 523: Jam Codes

    ADF: Paper Jam Errors Location Position Code Separation Sensor: On Skew Correction Sensor: On Interval Sensor: On Registration Sensor: On Exit Sensor: On Separation Sensor: Off Skew Correction Sensor: Off Interval Sensor: Off Registration Sensor: Off Exit Sensor: Off D062/D063/D065/D066 3-78 SM Appendix...

  • Page 524: Main Unit And Lct (B474): Paper Jam Errors

    Exit Unit Entrance SN: Late Paper Exit SN: Late Duplex Entrance SN: Late Duplex Transport SN 1: Late Duplex Transport SN 2: Late Duplex Transport SN 3: Late Duplex Exit SN: Late LCT Relay SN: Late SM Appendix 3-79 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 525 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Lag 4th Vertical Transport SN: Lag (Japan Only) Relay SN: Lag Registration SN: Lag Paper Exit SN: Lag Duplex Entrance SN: Lag Duplex Transport SN 2: Lag Duplex Transport SN 3: Lag D062/D063/D065/D066 3-80 SM Appendix...

  • Page 526: Finisher D374: Jam Codes

    Stapler Shift Motor R5 to R8 Stapler Motor R5 to R8 Feed Out Belt Motor R5 to R8 Paper Punch Motor R1 to R4 Finisher D373: Jam Codes Location Position Code Entrance Sensor R1 to R4 SM Appendix 3-81 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 527 Paper Punch Motor R1 to R4 ⇒ Finisher D460: Jam Codes Location Position Code Entrance Sensor R1 to R3 Proof Tray Exit Sensor R1 to R3 Shift Exit Sensor R1 to R3 Stapler Exit Sensor R4 to R7 D062/D063/D065/D066 3-82 SM Appendix...
  • Page 528 R4 to R7 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor R4 to R7 Punch Motor R1 to R3 Top Fence Motor R4 to R7 Bottom Fence Motor R4 to R7 R1 to R3 Main Machine Set. Incorrect / R4 to R7 SM Appendix 3-83 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 529: Mailbox B471: Jam Codes

    Entrance SN: Lag N1 to N5 Top Tray Exit SN: Late N1 to N5 Top Tray Exit SN: Lag N1 to N5 Horizontal Path Exit SN: Late N1 to N5 Horizontal Path Exit SN: Lag N1 to N5 D062/D063/D065/D066 3-84 SM Appendix...
  • Page 530 Jogger Fence Motor Jam N6 to N22 Positioning Roller Motor Jam N6 to N22 Direct-Send JG Motor Jam N6 to N22 FM6 Pawl Motor Jam N6 to N22 N1 to N5 Main Machine Set. Incorrect / N6 to N22 SM Appendix 3-85 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 531: Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes

    Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Remains Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Late Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Remains Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Late Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Remains Paper Fold Motor Lock Lower Stopper Motor Lock Upper Stopper Motor Lock D062/D063/D065/D066 3-86 SM Appendix...

  • Page 532: Appendix: Service Program Mode Tables

    APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES APPENDIX 4 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 12/29/2011 Corrected SP2507 default from 1 to 0. 11/20/2009 SP5227 05/09/11 SP5227-202 10/01/2009 SP5811 148 ~ 149 09/16/2009 SP5985 03/11/2010 SP6016 Added refer to SP6016 description 10/01/2009 SP6890 01/04/2012...
  • Page 534 Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed No Information Available (May 2009) 4.1.2 SYSTEM SP TABLES SP1xxx Feed 1001* Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern (SP2902-003, No.18). [–9 to +9/0/0.1mm] Specification: 3±2mm SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 535 002 Duplex Tray 003* By-pass Tray 1007 By-pass Feed Paper Size Display Use this SP to confirm the size of the paper detected in the by-pass tray if paper -001 is skewing during feeding. 1008* Duplex Fence Adjustment D062/D063/D065/D066 SM Appendix...
  • Page 536 Fusing Idling IdlingTime (Normal) D062/D063: [0 to 300 /0/1sec] *For only TWN [0 to300/8/1sec] D065: [0 to 300 /26/1sec] *For only TWN [0 to300/28/1sec] D066: [0 to 300 /160/1sec] IdlingTime (Low) D062/D063: [0 to 300 /66/1sec] *For only TWN [0 to300/68/1sec]...
  • Page 537 Fusing temperature during the ready condition and Normal Time (Center during printing. Thermistor) D062/D063/D065: [180 to 205/190/1 degree C] D066: [180 to 205/185/1 degree C] Fusing temperature during the ready condition Normal Time (End D062/D063/D065: [150 to 205/190/1 degree C]...
  • Page 538 Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when Small Size – Normal Paper printing on normal paper: (Center) D062/D063/D065: [150 to 205/190/1 degree C] D066: [150 to 200/185/1 degree C] Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when Small Size – Thick Paper...
  • Page 539 Service Program Mode Tables Center Lamp Temp (Small Size D062/D063/D065: [180 to 205/205/1 deg C] Paper) D066: [175 to 190/190/1 deg C] End Lamp Actual Time (Small D062/D063/D065: [0 to 120/60/1 sec.] Size Paper) D066: [0 to 60/10/1 sec] D062/D063/D065: [180 to 205/205/1 deg C]...
  • Page 540 Selects the speed (copies per minute) for copying on thick paper or tab sheets. A slower speed makes fusing better. This setting has no effect on fusing temperature. D062/D063/D065: [0 to 4/2/1 step] D066: [0 to 4/3/1 step] 0: 25 cpm...
  • Page 541 [10 to 20/9/1] 006 Web Length (0: 20m 1: 22.7m 2:28.5m 3:32m) Set the length of web. [0 to 3 / x /1] D062/D063/D065: x = 3, D066: x = 2 1903* Web Job End 001 Yes/No This determines whether the web motor is driven at the end of a job.
  • Page 542 1: The fusing motor turns the hot roller with no paper in the fusing unit. This ensures that the hot roller reaches the correct temperature. It is only done for thick paper or OHP. In this mode, the paper stops at the registration roller, then SM Appendix D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 543 This SP is for only D066. Low Temp. Sleep Mode (Pre-Idling) [0 to 180/60/ 1sec] 1909 LowSpeedMode 001 LowSpeedMode (Not used) 002 LowSpeedMode ProcessControl(Not used) Capacitator Status: Japan only 1910 001 Latest Capacity 002 Current Voltage D062/D063/D065/D066 4-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 544 Heater Full Power Setting: Japan only 1922 -001 0: OFF/1: ON 1923 HV Fusing Temp Cont -001 0: OFF/1: ON 10 Sec. Recovery Temperature: Japan only 1924 Temperature Sensor -001 C4c: [15 to 25/20/1] Idling Setting: Japan only 1925 SM Appendix 4-11 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 545: Sp2Xxx Drum

    This voltage changes every time auto process control starts up (every time the machine is switched on). 005 Total Bias Grid Voltage: OHP Total Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when OHP mode is selected. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 546 These SP codes allow adjustment of the laser intensity for Adjustment each of the four channels. LD2 Power [-64 to +64/0/1] Adjustment LD3 Power Adjustment These SP codes allow adjustment of the start/end timing of 005 LD0 Adjustment SM Appendix 4-13 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 547 Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200 dpi copying. [0 to 1/1] 1: On 0: Off 004 Reduction Mode On: 1200 dpi Copying Adjusts the amount of correction of uneven image generated during 1200 dpi D062/D063/D065/D066 4-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 548 [2 to 15/15/1] 005 Leading Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi) [2 to 15/7/1] 006 Trailing Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi) [2 to 15/15/1] 007 Continuous Pixel Level (600 dpi) 008 Independent Dot Pixel Level (600 dpi) SM Appendix 4-15 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 549 [100 to 800/300/10 V] 004 ID Sensor Pattern Dev. Potential Adjusts the development potential to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU [140 to 380/240/10 V] This SP and SP2201-002 must be changed together by the same amount. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 550 2210* ID Sensor Pattern Interval Adjusts the time interval between making ID sensor patterns onto the drum for Vsp/Vsg detection. SM Appendix 4-17 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 551 Note: If this SP is too high, toner on the paper can go back to the drum. 001 Main: Image: Front D062: [10 to 200/50/1 D063/D065: [10 to 200/65/1 002 Main: Image: Back D066: [10 to 200/80/1 D062/D063/D065: [10 to 200/75/1...
  • Page 552 Service Program Mode Tables D062/D063/D065: [10 to 200/75/1 006 Tab Paper D066: [10 to 200/80/1 [10 to 200/120/1 μA] 007 Thick Paper: Front D062bd: [10 to 200/75/1 008 OHP: Front Side D066: [10 to 200/80/1 [10 to 200/120/1 μA] 009 Tracing Paper: Front...
  • Page 553 Note: The PTL operates only when copying with plain paper or translucent paper. It D062/D063/D065/D066 4-20 SM Appendix...
  • Page 554 TD sensor to make the TD sensor output -001 about 3.0 V. When SP2967 is on, the TD sensor output is set to about 2.5 V. Note: Execute this SP only after replacing the TD sensor or developer. SM Appendix 4-21 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 555 1: Forces test pattern output with SP2902 003. The write exposure gamma table is not applied. Current image mode selection or other settings are ignored. 2901 Humidity Control 0: OFF 1:ON [0 or 1/ 0 / -] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 556 [4.0 to 12.0/9.7/0.1 V] 2909* Main Scan Magnification 001 Copy Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying. [–2.0 to +2.0/0/0.1%] 2910* Writing Sub Scan Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying. [–1.0 to +1.0/0/0.1%] SM Appendix 4-23 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 557 Toner is applied, and this must be cleaned off the belt. This SP mode determines whether bias is applied to the transfer belt cleaning bias roller at this time. DFU [0 to 1/1] 0: Off 1: On Switching this function on adds 3 s to the job time. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 558 LCT. Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Trailing Edge: Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the Thick Paper trailing edge during copying with thick paper from the LCT. SM Appendix 4-25 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 559 Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the Trailing Edge: trailing edge during copying with punch. After Punch [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with Off Timing: After punch from the LCT. Punch [–30 to +30/-16/1 mm] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 560 Leading Edge: leading edge during copying with thick paper. Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Trailing Edge: Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the Thick Paper trailing edge during copying with thick paper.. SM Appendix 4-27 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 561 After Punch [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with Off Timing: After punch. Punch [–30 to +30/-16/1 mm] 2933 Transfer Current On/Off Timing: Tray2 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 562 Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the Trailing Edge: trailing edge during copying with thick paper.. Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] SM Appendix 4-29 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 563 Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with Off Timing: After punch. Punch [–30 to +30/-16/1 mm] 2934 Transfer Current On/Off Timing: Tray3 001 La1 (Front) Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 564 Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the Trailing Edge: trailing edge during copying with thick paper.. Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] SM Appendix 4-31 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 565 After Punch [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with Off Timing: After punch. Punch [–30 to +30/-16/1 mm] Transfer Current On/Off Timing: Tray 4 Japan Only 2935* 001 To 020 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 566 Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the Leading Edge: leading edge during copying with thick paper. Thick Paper [0 to +20/0/1 mm] 011 Trailing Edge: Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the SM Appendix 4-33 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 567 [0 to +20/0/1 mm] Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with Off Timing: M-thick paper. M-Thick [–30 to +30/15/1 mm] On Timing: After Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with Punch punch. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 568 Vh Pattern Create 001 Exposure Level [0 to 15/7/1] 002 Offset Light Amount [-100 to 0/-45/1] Process Interval Additional Time. DFU 2960 [0 to 7/0/1 sec] Developer Adjust Mode DFU 2961 2962 Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions SM Appendix 4-35 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 569 Determines whether transfer current is switched on or off while the blade protection pattern is created. DFU Sets Off, toner is applied to the entire cleaning area and drum cleaning blade. [0 to 1/1] 0: Off D062/D063/D065/D066 4-36 SM Appendix...
  • Page 570 Toner Bottle Revolution Sets the standard number of copies by using the number of toner bottle rotations. DFU 001 Copy Count Setting [50 to 500/100/1] Press "Execute" to reset the toner bottle rotation count. 002 Count Reset SM Appendix 4-37 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 571: Sp3Xxx Processing

    Recovers the machine when an SC is logged because the ID Sensor Initial Setting is not done after doing an NVRAM Clear or replacing the NVRAM. Reset this SP to the factory setting in this case. [0 to 255/70/1] 002 ID Sensor Initialization D062/D063/D065/D066 4-38 SM Appendix...
  • Page 572 Note: If the ID sensor output is abnormal, an SC is logged and the displays change: SC350-01 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.00/0.00/0.00 SC350-02 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 5.00/5.00/5.00 SC350-03 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.01/0.01/0.01 3901* Auto Process Control On/Off Setting Determines whether the machine checks and corrects the drum potential (Vd) SM Appendix 4-39 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 573 004 Vg Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd adjustment. [0 to 0xFFFF/0/0] 005 LD Level Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest Vh adjustment. [-127 to 127/0/0] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 574 Sets the amount of time the drum turns in the drum rotation mode before the first copy after the machine is turned on. SP3903-001 must be on or this setting has no effect. [120 to 600/240/1] 3904 Warm Up Short Mode SM Appendix 4-41 D062/D063/D065/D066...

  • Page 575: Sp4Xxx Scanner

    Adjust the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub scan direction. 4010* [-3.0 to +3.0/0.1mm] This setting ensures that the point where the original strikes the registration roller matches the point where the F-GATE signal will trigger the start of scanning in the D062/D063/D065/D066 4-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 576 Switches on/off a scanner free run. The scanning area is A3. Press "On" or "Off". 001 Book Mode: Lamp Off Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp off. 002 Book Mode: Lamp On Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on. SM Appendix 4-43 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 577 If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on. Correction Level: Front Sets the level for vertical line correction (the black vertical lines caused by dust on the ADF exposure glass). D062/D063/D065/D066 4-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 578 Operation Check APS Sensor Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the 4301 exposure glass. If a non-standard size is placed on the glass, asterisks (*) are displayed. 4303* Set Minimum Size for APS SM Appendix 4-45 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 579 Note: "LE" denotes "leading edge" and "TE" denotes "trailing edge". 001 Book:Sub Scan:Leading Edge 002 Book:Sub Scan:Trailing Edge [0 to 3/0/0.1 mm] 003 Book:Main Scan:Leading Edge (Rear) 004 Book:Main Scan:Trailing Edge (Front) 005 ADF: Sub Scan: Leading Edge [0 to 3/2/0.1 mm] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 580 Slanted Grid Pattern 256 Gradations: K 16-Step Check Pattern Gray Patch 1: 16-Step Gray Patch 2: 16-Step Gray Patch: 64-Step Large Grid Uneven Density Check Banding Check 1 Banding Check 2 Overall Coverage Shading Check Text Check SM Appendix 4-47 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 581 This SP sets the lower limit and level for background removal when background removal is selected with a scanner application. 001 Low Limit Value [0 to 1023/392/1] 002 Background level [0 to 1023/972/1] 4540 Print Coverage Correction RY Phase: Option D062/D063/D065/D066 4-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 582 [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] YG Phase: B [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] GY Phase: Option [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] GY Phase: R [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] GY Phase: G SM Appendix 4-49 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 583 [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] CB Phase: R [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] CB Phase: G [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] CB Phase: B [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] BC Phase: Option D062/D063/D065/D066 4-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 584 [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] MB Phase: B [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] MR Phase: Option [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] MR Phase: R [0 to 255/ 0 / 1] MR Phase: G SM Appendix 4-51 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 585 005 MTF Level: 0-15 (0:OFF, 15:High) Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. [0 to 15/8/1] 006 Smoothing Level: 0-7 (0:Low, 7:High) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-52 SM Appendix...
  • Page 586 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. [0 to 15/8/1] 006 Smoothing Level: 0-7 (0:Low, 7:High) Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother. [0 to 7/4/1] SM Appendix 4-53 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 587 Displays the DAGL_F ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU adjusts automatically at power on. [0 to FFh/1] Gray Balance Adj Value: R DFU 4609* 001 Displays the reference voltage for Red adjusted by gray balance adjustment. Gray Balance Adj Value: G DFU 4610* D062/D063/D065/D066 4-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 588 003 R FC:L:R 005 R BK:F:R 007 R BK:L:R Gain Range Adj Value: G DFU 4629 001 R FC:F:G 003 R FC:L:G 005 R BK:F:G 007 R BK:L:G Gain Range Adj Value: B DFU 4630 001 R FC:F:B SM Appendix 4-55 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 589 007 R BK:L:RE 008 R BK:L:RO Gain Adj Value G DFU 4632 001 R FC:F:GE 002 R FC:F:GO 003 R FC:L:GE 004 R FC:L:GO 005 R BK:F:GE 006 R BK:F:GO 007 R BK:L:GE 008 R BK:L:GO D062/D063/D065/D066 4-56 SM Appendix...
  • Page 590 0: No error, 1: Error b11: GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_BO b10: GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_BE b 9: GAIN_ERR1_FC_F_BO b 8: GAIN_ERR1_FC_F_BE b 7: GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_GO b 6: GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_GE 002 Gain1:Last Displays the eroor flag for the gain 1 last data. 0: No error, 1: Error SM Appendix 4-57 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 591 005 Black Level :First :FC Displays the eroor flag for the first full color data at the black level adjustment. 0: No error, 1: Error b11: BLACK_ERR_FC_F_BOO b10: BLACK_ERR_FC_F_BEO b 9: BLACK_ERR_FC_F_BOE b 8: BLACK_ERR_FC_F_BEE b 7: BLACK_ERR_FC_F_GOO D062/D063/D065/D066 4-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 592 Displays the eroor flag for last B/W data at the black level adjustment. 0: No error, 1: Error b11: BLACK_ERR_BK_L_BOO b10: BLACK_ERR_BK_ L _BEO b 9: BLACK_ERR_BK_ L _BOE b 8: BLACK_ERR_BK_ L _BEE b 7: BLACK_ERR_BK_ L _GOO b 6: BLACK_ERR_BK_L_GEO 4647 [Read Hard Error] 001 Power-ON SM Appendix 4-59 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 593 005 BK:F:G:Factory Setting 007 BK:L:G:Factory Setting Gain Range Adj Value DFU 4679 001 FC:F:B:Factory Setting 003 FC:L:B:Factory Setting 005 BK:F:B:Factory Setting 007 BK:L:B:Factory Setting Gain Range Adj Value DFU 4680 001 FC:F:RE:Factory Setting 002 FC:F:RO:Factory Setting D062/D063/D065/D066 4-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 594 005 BK:F:GE:Factory Setting 006 BK:F:GO:Factory Setting 007 BK:L:GE:Factory Setting 008 BK:L:GO:Factory Setting Gain Range Adj Value DFU 4682 001 FC:F:BE:Factory Setting 002 FC:F:BO:Factory Setting 003 FC:L:BE:Factory Setting 004 FC:L:BO:Factory Setting 005 BK:F:BE:Factory Setting 006 BK:F:BO:Factory Setting SM Appendix 4-61 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 595 005 BK:F:RE 006 BK:F:RO 007 BK:L:RE 008 BK:L:RO White Level Peak Data DFU 4691 001 FC:F:GE 002 FC:F:GO 003 FC:L:GE 004 FC:L:GO 005 BK:F:GE 006 BK:F:GO 007 BK:L:GE 008 BK:L:GO White Level Peak Data DFU 4692 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-62 SM Appendix...
  • Page 596 007 BK:L:BE 008 BK:L:BO Black Level Data DFU 4693 001 FC:F:REE 002 FC:F:ROE 003 FC:F:REO 004 FC:F:ROO 005 FC:L:REE 006 FC:L:ROE 007 FC:L:REO 008 FC:L:ROO 009 BK:F:REE 010 BK:F:ROE 011 BK:F:REO 012 BK:F:ROO 013 BK:L:REE 014 BK:L:ROE SM Appendix 4-63 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 597 003 FC:F:GEO 004 FC:F:GOO 005 FC:L:GEE 006 FC:L:GOE 007 FC:L:GEO 008 FC:L:GOO 009 BK:F:GEE 010 BK:F:GOE 011 BK:F:GEO 012 BK:F:GOO 013 BK:L:GEE 014 BK:L:GOE 015 BK:L:GEO 016 BK:L:GOO Black Level Data DFU 4695 001 FC:F:BEE 002 FC:F:BOE D062/D063/D065/D066 4-64 SM Appendix...
  • Page 598 Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power. 4705 Operation Displays whether density adjustment was executed for the CIS, using the white 001* roller. [0 to 1/1] 0: Not executed, 1: Executed 002 Result Operation SM Appendix 4-65 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 599 Displays the GB chart level for Blue signal: [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit] GB Adj Value R DFU 4712* GB Adj Value G DFU 4713* GB Adj Value B DFU 4714* 001 [-512 to 512 / 0 / -] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-66 SM Appendix...
  • Page 600 [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] Trailing Edge 002 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the trailing edge of Green signal. [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] SM Appendix 4-67 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 601 [0 to 255 / 64 / 1 digit] Max: BK 004 Adjusts the upper limit threshold for the white level peak range of Red signal in the B/W mode. [0 to 255 / 245 / 1 digit] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-68 SM Appendix...
  • Page 602 [0 to 255 / 64 / 1 digit] Max: FC 002 Adjusts the upper limit threshold for the white level peak range of Blue signal in the full color mode. [0 to 255 / 245 / 1 digit] 003 Min: BK SM Appendix 4-69 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 603 [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] Factory: BK 002 Displays the factory setting data of white level peak data for Green in the B/W mode. [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-70 SM Appendix...
  • Page 604 001 Displays the current red data of white level peak data for Green in the full color mode. [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] 002 Displays the current red data of white level peak data for Green in the B/W mode. [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit] SM Appendix 4-71 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 605 Digital AE: Back DFU 4797* 001 Low Limit Value [0 to 1023/ 392 / 1 digit] 002 Background level [0 to 1023/ 972 / 1 digit] LED Lighting Duty: Back DFU 4798 001 FC 002 BK D062/D063/D065/D066 4-72 SM Appendix...
  • Page 606 [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm] + value: The home position of the caridge unit is moved away from the leading edge. -value: The home position of the caridge unit is moved close to the leading edge. 4804 Home Position Operation SM Appendix 4-73 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 607 003 BLUE Result FL Detection 4808 Displays the each data of the FL correction. [0 to 1023 / - / 1] FR1 to FR20 LR1 to LR20 FG1 to FG20 LG1 to LG20 FB1 to FB20 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-74 SM Appendix...
  • Page 608 LG1 to LG20 FB1 to FB20 LB1 to LB20 4903 Image Quality Adjustment These SP codes adjust the sharpness and granularity of printed images. 001 Independent Dot Erase: Text [0 to 7 / 0 / 1] SM Appendix 4-75 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 609 SP4-907-1 to 1. [0 to 1023/512/1] Manual Gamma Adjustment DFU 4918 -009 IPU Image Pass Selection RGB Frame Memory DFU 4991 [0 to 11/2/1] High Light Correction DFU 4993 [0 to 9/4/1] Sensitivity Selection Range Selection D062/D063/D065/D066 4-76 SM Appendix...

  • Page 610: Sp5Xxx Mode

    1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Black Total, Black Copies, Black Prints. 5047 Paper Display 001 Backing Paper Display Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed on the operation panel. [0 to 1/0/1] SM Appendix 4-77 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 611 5062 panel. PM parts can be selected independently for display. [ON] OFF Note: SP5066 must be set to "1: Display". 001 #Development Unit 002 Developer 003 #Drum Unit 004 Drum Pick-off Pawls 005 #Drum Cleaning Unit D062/D063/D065/D066 4-78 SM Appendix...
  • Page 612 020 Pressure Roller 021 #Fusing Cleaning Unit 022 Web Roll 023 Web Cleaning Roll 024 Web Brake Pad 025 Toner Suction Bottle 026 Toner Suction Motor 027 Tray 1 Roller Assembly 028 Feed Roller – Tray 1 SM Appendix 4-79 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 613 046 ADF Pick-up Roller 047 Tray 4 Roller Assembly 048 Feed Roller – Tray 4 049 Pick-up Roller – Tray 4 050 Separation Roller – Tray 4 051 Tray 5 Roller Assembly 052 Feed Roller – Tray 5 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-80 SM Appendix...
  • Page 614 Note: Individual PM parts can be selected for display or no display with SP5062. Part Replacement Operation Type Configures the PM parts display for either the customer engineer (Service) or 5067 user. [*0: Service] [1: User] Note: SP5066 must be set to "1: Display". 001 #Development Unit SM Appendix 4-81 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 615 015 Pre-Charge Corona Wire 016 Pre-Charge Grid Plate 017 #Fusing Unit 018 Hot Roller Strippers 019 Hot Roller 020 Pressure Roller 021 #Fusing Cleaning Unit 022 Web Roll 023 Web Cleaning Roll 024 Web Brake Pad D062/D063/D065/D066 4-82 SM Appendix...
  • Page 616 040 Transfer Belt 041 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 042 Toner Filter 043 ADF Transfer Belt 044 ADF Separation Roller 045 ADF Feed Belt 046 ADF Pick-up Roller 047 Tray 4 Roller Assembly 048 Feed Roller – Tray 4 SM Appendix 4-83 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 617 Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) 5112 [0 to 1/1] 0: No 1: Yes. If "1" is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper D062/D063/D065/D066 4-84 SM Appendix...
  • Page 618 3: Expansion Device 3 5114 Optional Counter I/F This SP sets the machine for the MF Key Card Extension. 0: OFF, 1: ON Disable Copying 5118 Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only [0 to 1/1] SM Appendix 4-85 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 619 APS OFF Mode This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or 5127 pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine. [0 to 1/1] 0: On, 1: Off D062/D063/D065/D066 4-86 SM Appendix...
  • Page 620 [0 to 1/1] 0: Soft Key Set, 1: Hard Key Set Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off 5167 Determines the Fax print mode when the optional counter is off. 0: Print automatically. 1: Not do auto-print. SM Appendix 4-87 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 621 HDD. If the size of the LS area is increased, the size of the TEMP area must be decreased. Changing this SP increases the default value for the size of the LS area from 5,000 pages to 20,000 pages. A larger setting is not possible. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-88 SM Appendix...
  • Page 622 0: Productivity priority 1: Tray priority 5196 CE Login 0: Does not execute CE Login or 1: Execute CE login 5199 Paper Set After Staple End Enables or disables feeding out of the finisher without stapling. SM Appendix 4-89 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 623 [0 to 1/0/1] 0: Display off, 1: Display on 201 Allow Page No. Entry This SP specifies the number of digits to display for the entry of the starting page number. [2 to 9/9/1] 202 Zero Surplus Setting D062/D063/D065/D066 4-90 SM Appendix...
  • Page 624 Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 1st, 2nd 0 cannot be input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit setting) Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday SM Appendix 4-91 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 625 Used to assign the default access user access privileges to their own documents on the document server. 162 Extend Certification Detail Logout without an IC card. [0 to 1/0/1] 0: Not allowed (default) 1: Allowed 200 SDK1 Unique ID D062/D063/D065/D066 4-92 SM Appendix...
  • Page 626 [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Password NULL not permitted. 1: Password NULL permitted. 5413 Lockout Setting 001 Lockout On/Off Switches the local address book account lock on/off. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On SM Appendix 4-93 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 627 [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On 002 Mitigation Time Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords. [0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-94 SM Appendix...
  • Page 628 Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information. [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step] 5417 Access Attack 001 Access Permissible Number Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP features. SM Appendix 4-95 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 629 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications. [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off 011 Document Server Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server. [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off D062/D063/D065/D066 4-96 SM Appendix...
  • Page 630 [0 to 1/0/1 0: OFF 1: ON 5431 External Auth User Preset Allows or does not allow the copying for each data. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Not allowed copying, 1: Allowed copying 010 Tag SM Appendix 4-97 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 631 [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Off, 1: On 002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs. [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Off, 1: On D062/D063/D065/D066 4-98 SM Appendix...
  • Page 632 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) Error Alarm 5505 Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU [0 to 255 / 50 / 100 copies per step] 5507 Supply Alarm SM Appendix 4-99 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 633 132 Interval: A3 sizes. [00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] 133 Interval: A4 134 Interval: A5 141 Interval: B4 142 Interval: B5 160 Interval: DLT 164 Interval: LG D062/D063/D065/D066 4-100 SM Appendix...
  • Page 634 5513 Normal Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies. [1 to 9999 / 350 / 1] Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned originals. SM Appendix 4-101 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 635 The following data stored in the NVRAM will not be saved to the SD card when 5801 you perform an NVRAM data upload (SP5824). Total counter value C/O, P/O counter values Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420mm, Stapler, and Scanner counter values D062/D063/D065/D066 4-102 SM Appendix...
  • Page 636 Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents. (MCS: Memory Control Service) 006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings. 007 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer. SM Appendix 4-103 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 637 Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings. 017 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings. 018 SRM Clear Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings. 019 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-104 SM Appendix...
  • Page 638 Option Connection Check This SP displays whether the devices listed below are connected or not. 1: Connected, 0: Not connected. 001 ADF (1: Connect) 002 Bank (1: Connect) 003 LCT (1: Connect) 004 Fin (1: Connct) SM Appendix 4-105 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 639 2: @Remote service on CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Start of the service 1: End of the service D062/D063/D065/D066 4-106 SM Appendix...
  • Page 640 011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method. [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing Selects the RFU timing. [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] SM Appendix 4-107 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 641 Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N. The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128 character are ignored. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-108 SM Appendix...
  • Page 642 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update. SM Appendix 4-109 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 643 Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-110 SM Appendix...
  • Page 644 Displays the macro version of the @Remote 087 CERT: Macro Ver. certification. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote 088 CERT: PAC Ver. certification. Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. 089 CERT: ID2 Code Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). SM Appendix 4-111 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 645 Displays the end time of the period for which the 094 CERT: Valid End current @Remote certification is enabled. Selection Country Not used Line Type Automatic Judgment Not used Line Type Judgment Result Not used Selection Dial/Push Not used D062/D063/D065/D066 4-112 SM Appendix...
  • Page 646 Not used FAX TX Priority Not used 200 Manual Polling Not used Regist: Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device. 0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set. SM Appendix 4-113 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 647 205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway. 206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration". Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-114 SM Appendix...
  • Page 648 Attempted setting with illegal entries for -12004 certification and ID2. @Remote communication is prohibited. -12005 The device has an Embedded RC gate-related problem. A confirmation request was made after -12006 the confirmation had been already completed. SM Appendix 4-115 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 649 Incorrect request number format 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log. 5821 Remote Service Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) 002 RCG IP Address *CTL destination for call processing at the remote service center. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-116 SM Appendix...
  • Page 650 10) Input the data listed above manually. NVRAM Data Download Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After 5825 downloading is completed, remove the SD card and turn the machine power off and on. SM Appendix 4-117 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 651 IPP bit3: SMB bit4: BMLinkS bit5: DIPRINT bit6: sftp bit7: (Reserved) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol. 090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable D062/D063/D065/D066 4-118 SM Appendix...
  • Page 652 Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The 158 IPv6 Gateway Address IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. IPv6 Stateless Auto Enables or disables the automatic setting for Setting IPv6 stateless. SM Appendix 4-119 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 653 Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web Web shopping Link system. Visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 654 010 HDD Formatting (Log) 011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder) 5836 Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected. SM Appendix 4-121 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 655 0:JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Copy B&W Text [0 to 3/1] 0:JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Copy B&W Other [0 to 3/1] 0:JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR D062/D063/D065/D066 4-122 SM Appendix...
  • Page 656 [5 to 95/40/1] Default Format for Back Up Files Sets the format for backup files created when the print backup function is used. [0 to 4/0/1] 0: TIFF 1: JPEG 2: J2K 3: PDF Single 4: PDF Multi SM Appendix 4-123 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 657 101 Sets the IP address of the PC designated to operate as the primary capture server (CS). [000.000.000.000] Primary srv scheme Sets the IO device of the primary CS remotely. Max. characters: 6 103 Primary svr port number D062/D063/D065/D066 4-124 SM Appendix...
  • Page 658 121 Sets the IO device of the CS remotely. [0 to 6/3/1] 0: 600dpi, 1: 400dpi, 2: 300dpi, 3: 200dpi, 4: 150dpi, 5: 100dpi, 6: 75dpi Reso: Copy (Mono) Sets the IO device of the CS remotely: [0 to 6/3/1] SM Appendix 4-125 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 659 0: 600dpi, 1: 400dpi, 2: 300dpi, 3: 200dpi, 4: 150dpi, 5: 100dpi, 6: 75dpi All addr Info Switch Expands the scope of used resources and performance. Switch this off if this feature is not being used. [0 to 1/1/1] 1: ON D062/D063/D065/D066 4-126 SM Appendix...
  • Page 660 Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed. Fragment Thresh 042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card. [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1] This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. SM Appendix 4-127 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 661 011 Staple Std 1 012 Staple Std 2 013 Staple Std 3 014 Staple Std 4 021 Staple Bind 1 022 Staple Bind 2 023 Staple Bind 3 031 Ring Name (50/black) 032 Ring Name (50/white) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-128 SM Appendix...
  • Page 662 Transfer Rate 001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission. [Full Speed] [Auto Change] Vendor ID 002 Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU Product ID Sets the product ID. SM Appendix 4-129 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 663 Provides items for delivery server settings. FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. Range: 000.000.000.000 to 002 IP Address (Primary) 255.255.255.255 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-130 SM Appendix...
  • Page 664 Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists SM Appendix 4-131 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 665 This is used for the scan router program. Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Disable, 1: Enable 5846 UCS Settings *CTL D062/D063/D065/D066 4-132 SM Appendix...
  • Page 666 UCS. LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server. 020 WSD Maximum Entries 040 Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD) SM Appendix 4-133 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 667 Clears the local address book information, 047 Initialize Local Addr Book including the user code. Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book Book information, except the user code. 049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information, D062/D063/D065/D066 4-134 SM Appendix...
  • Page 668 Complexity Option 1 062 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. SM Appendix 4-135 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 669 003 Rate for Copy B&W Other 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 005 Rate for Printer B&W 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi 6: 2/3x1 "6: 2/3x" applies to 003, 005 only. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-136 SM Appendix...
  • Page 670 (Lower 4 Bits) Repository: Download Image Max. [1 to 1024/1 K] Size 210 Setting: Log Type: Job 1 Switches access control on/off. 211 Setting: Log Type: Job 2 0000: OFF, 0001: ON 212 Setting: LogType Access SM Appendix 4-137 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 671 003 Total Counter Displays the total count from the day set with SP5849-001. [0 to 9999 9999] Address Book Function 5850 Not used Bluetooth Mode 5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth unit. Press either key. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-138 SM Appendix...
  • Page 672 005 Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be SM Appendix 4-139 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 673 Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors. 002 Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors. 003 Any SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ] 004 Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-140 SM Appendix...
  • Page 674 021 Determines whether RFC2298compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail. [0 to 1/1] 0: No, 1: Yes SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the SM Appendix 4-141 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 675 Enables or disables the e-mail notification to @Remote. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0: Enable, 1: Disable 005 Add Date Field Disables and re-enables the addition of a date field to the email notification. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-142 SM Appendix...
  • Page 676 SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot. OFF: 1 (Does not reboot automatically. Changing this setting to "0" sets the SM Appendix 4-143 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 677 Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel. Then erase all the fixed phase block. 5885 WIM Settings DFU Doc Svr Acc Ctrl Meaning Forbid all document server access (1) Forbid user mode access (1) Forbid print function (1) Forbid fax TX (1) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-144 SM Appendix...
  • Page 678 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: No authentication, No protection for logs 1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs) SDK Application Couner 5893 Displays the counter name of each SDK application. SM Appendix 4-145 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 679 After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times. Switchover Permission Time 5913 If no key is pressed when there is an application with display control rights, D062/D063/D065/D066 4-146 SM Appendix...
  • Page 680 Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that 5967 prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the SM Appendix 4-147 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 681 Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press Execute. 001 All (Data List) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-148 SM Appendix...
  • Page 682 Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode. [–5 to +5/0/0.1 mm] ADF Buckle Adjustment 1 Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A higher setting causes more buckling. [–3 to +3/0/0.1 mm] 006 ADF Buckle Adjustment 2 SM Appendix 4-149 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 683 [-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm] ⇒ Original Size Determination Priority ( 4.2.11 For more information) 6016 Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection. [0 to 255/0/1] ( 4.2.11 SP6016: Original Size Determination Priority 6017 Sheet Through Magnification D062/D063/D065/D066 4-150 SM Appendix...
  • Page 684 - Value: Shift punch unit against direction of feed. 003 EU: 4-Hole 004 NEU: 4-Hole 005 NA: 2-Hole 006 JPN: 1-1Hole 6102 Punch Hole Position Adjustment Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. SM Appendix 4-151 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 685 + Value: Increases the time that the finisher entrance roller remains off. 003 A4 SEF - Value: Descreases the time that the finisher entrance roller remains off. 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF 007 DLT SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-152 SM Appendix...
  • Page 686 011 12" x 18" 012 Other 6105 Jogger Fence Fine Adjust This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the finisher stapling tray. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the SM Appendix 4-153 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 687 The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as tight. 001 A3 SEF The settings are done for each paper size. SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed". 002 B4 SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-154 SM Appendix...
  • Page 688 001 A3 SEF The settings are done for each paper size. SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed". 002 B4 SEF LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed". 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF SM Appendix 4-155 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 689 B4 SEF booklet before it exits the folding unit of the Booklet Finisher. When set at the default (0): A4 SEF The folding blade pushes the center of the stack into the B5 SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-156 SM Appendix...
  • Page 690 Note: After installation of the Output Jogger Unit B703, this 003 A4 SEF SP must be set to "1" for the jogging motor to operate the 004 A4 LEF jogging fences. 005 LT LEF 006 B5 LEF SM Appendix 4-157 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 691 See "p.4-258 "Finisher 1 Input Check: SP6121 (D373/D374)"" in the "Input/Output Check" section. 6122 Finisher Input Check: Finisher 2 (Finisher D460) See "p.4-263 "Finisher 2 Input Check: SP6122"" in the "Input/Output Check" section. 6124 Finisher Output Check: Finisher 1 (Finisher D373/D374) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-158 SM Appendix...
  • Page 692 Touch [1:+1 Time] to have the jogger fences press against the sides of the stack on the staple tray one 002 B4 SEF more time to align the stack for corner stapling. [*0:Default] or [1:+1 Time] 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF SM Appendix 4-159 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 693 Turn on the electrical 003 SortTray Shift Tray Motor: 1 Operation components of the finisher 004 SortTray Tray Lift Motor: Up individually for test purposes. 005 SortTray Tray Lift Motor: Down 006 SortTray Tray Lift Motor: 1 Operation D062/D063/D065/D066 4-160 SM Appendix...
  • Page 694 003 1st Fold A4 SEF 004 1st Fold DLT SEF 005 1st Fold LG SEF 006 1st Fold LT SEF 007 1st Fold 12"x18" 008 1st Fold Other 009 2nd Fold A3 SEF 010 2nd Fold B4 SEF SM Appendix 4-161 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 695 001 Free Run 1 002 Free Run 2 003 Free Run 3 004 Free Run 4 6312 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-162 SM Appendix...
  • Page 696 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai 019 Other 6314 FM2 Equal Halves Fold Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF SM Appendix 4-163 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 697 FM3 Equal 3rds Fold1 Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai D062/D063/D065/D066 4-164 SM Appendix...
  • Page 698 FM4 3rds 1 Flap In Fold1 Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai SM Appendix 4-165 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 699 FM5 4ths "V" Center Fold1 Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai D062/D063/D065/D066 4-166 SM Appendix...
  • Page 700 FM6 4ths 2 Flaps In Fold1 Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 008 8-Kai 009 B5 SEF SM Appendix 4-167 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 701 FM6 4ths 2 Flaps In Fold3 Fine Adj. (D454) 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm] 006 LT SEF 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai 009 B5 SEF Other D062/D063/D065/D066 4-168 SM Appendix...
  • Page 702 Registration Buckle Adjust (D454) 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF [-4 to 2 / 0 / 1 mm] 006 LT SEF 007 12"x18" 008 8-Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other SM Appendix 4-169 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 703 Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test 014 Paper Detect Sn 6 purposes. 015 Vertical Transport Sn4: Bin7 016 Paper Overflow Sn 6 017 Paper Detect Sn 7 018 Paper Overflow Sn 7 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-170 SM Appendix...
  • Page 704 008 Turn Gate SOL 6 009 Turn Gate SOL 7 010 Turn Gate SOL 8 6352 Mail Box Free Run 001 Free Run 1 6450 Cover Feeder Size Change 001 All A3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] SM Appendix 4-171 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 705 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 013 Length Sensor 1 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 014 Length Sensor 2 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 015 Length Sensor 3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-172 SM Appendix...
  • Page 706 [0 to 1/1] 0: Original set, 1: Copy start 6910 Intermittent Shading Select ON or OFF of the intermittent shading in running the copy app. 001 ON/OFF 0: OFF (do shading every time) / 1: ON SM Appendix 4-173 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 707 Displays the total number of SCs logged. SC History 7403 Displays the latest 10 service call codes 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-174 SM Appendix...
  • Page 708 005 3rd Paper Feed SN: Late 006 4th Paper Feed SN: Late 008 1st Vertical Transport SN: Late 009 2nd Vertical Transport SN: Late 010 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Late 011 4th Vertical Transport SN: Late 012 Relay SN: Late SM Appendix 4-175 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 709 055 3rd Paper Feed SN: Lag 056 4th Paper Feed SN: Lag 058 1st Vertical Transport SN: Lag 059 2nd Vertical Transport SN: Lag 060 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Lag 061 4th Vertical Transport SN: Lag D062/D063/D065/D066 4-176 SM Appendix...
  • Page 710 106 Finisher: Corner Stapling 109 Finisher: Shift Tray Motor 110 Finisher: Jogger Fence Motor 111 Finisher: Shift Roller Motor 112 Finisher: Stapler Shift Motor 113 Finisher: Stapler Motor 115 Finisher: Feed Out Belt Motor 116 Finisher: Paper Punch Motor SM Appendix 4-177 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 711 136 Finisher: Paper Punch Motor 151 Fin: Entrance Sensor 152 Fin: Proof Tray Exit Sn 153 Fin: Shift Exit Sn 154 Fin: Stapler Exit 155 Fin: Pre-Stack 156 Fin: Feed Out 158 Fin: Upper Trans Motor D062/D063/D065/D066 4-178 SM Appendix...
  • Page 712 174 Fin: Punch Motor 175 Fin: Top Fence Motor 176 Fin: Bottom Fence Motor ⇒ 197 GBC Jam Reset 198 Plockmatic Jam 199 GBC Jam 201 Mail Bin: Vertical Transport Sn 1 202 Mail Bin: Vertical Transport Sn 2 SM Appendix 4-179 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 713 056 Registration Sensor: Off 057 Original Exit Sensor: Off Jam Count by Paper Size 7506 Displays the total number of jams by paper size. 005 A4 LEF Displays the total number of jams by paper size. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-180 SM Appendix...
  • Page 714 CODE is the SP7504-* number (see above). 006 Latest 5 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex. TOTAL is the total jam error count 007 Latest 6 DATE is the date the jams occurred. 008 Latest 7 SM Appendix 4-181 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 715 CODE: 007 002 Latest 1 SIZE: 05h TOTAL: 0000334 003 Latest 2 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 D062/D063/D065/D066 4-182 SM Appendix...
  • Page 716 048 Pressure Timing SN: Late 049 Pressure Timing SN: Lag 050 Contact Timing SN: Late 051 Contact Timing SN: Lag 052 2 Stopper Motor: Late 053 2 Stopper Motor: Lag 054 Paper Exit Sensor 1: Late SM Appendix 4-183 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 717 106 3rd Stopper HP SN: Late 107 3rd Stopper HP SN: Lag 108 Skew Correction Jam 109 Folded Paper Path Jam 111 Entrance JG Motor Jam 112 Fold JG Motor Jam 113 1st Stopper Motor Jam D062/D063/D065/D066 4-184 SM Appendix...
  • Page 718 Document Feed Clears the counter of SP7617- 002 Display PM Count 7621 0 to 99999999 Clear PM Count 7622 This SP clears the PM counts for the components below. 7623 Unit PM Target 0 to 99999999 SM Appendix 4-185 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 719 006 Hot Roller Strippers 007 Cleaning Roller 008 Cleaning Roller Bearings 009 Web Roll 010 Web Cleaning Roller 011 Web Bushings 012 Development Filter 013 Toner Recycling Unit 014 Pressure Release Filter 015 Charge Corona Wire 016 Grid Plate D062/D063/D065/D066 4-186 SM Appendix...
  • Page 720 028 Separation Roller-Tray1 029 Feed Roller-Tray2 030 Pick-up Roller-Tray2 031 Separation Roller-Tray2 032 Feed Roller-Tray3 033 Pick-up Roller-Tray3 034 Separation Roller-Tray3 035 Feed Roller-Tray4 036 Pick-up Roller-Tray4 037 Separation Roller-Tray4 038 Feed Roller-LCT 039 Pick-up Roller-LCT SM Appendix 4-187 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 721 005 ROM No. ADF 007 ROM No.Finisher 009 ROM No.Bank 010 ROM No.LCT 011 ROM No.Mail Box 020 ROM No.Cover Interposer 024 ROM No.Capacitaotr (JPN only) 025 ROM No.Holding Unit 105 Fireware ADF 107 Fireware Finisher 109 Fireware Bank D062/D063/D065/D066 4-188 SM Appendix...
  • Page 722 A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected. 002 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected. 7827 MF Error Counter Clear SM Appendix 4-189 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 723 Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board. 7852 DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Counter [0 to 65535/0/1] Dust Counter Clear Counter [0 to 65535/0/1] Dust Detection Counter: Back [0 to 65536/0/1] 7901 Assert Info. 001 File Name D062/D063/D065/D066 4-190 SM Appendix...
  • Page 724 009 Web Roll 010 Web Cleaning Roller 011 Web Bushings 012 Development Filter 013 Toner Recycling Unit 014 Pressure Release Filter 015 Charge Corona Wire 016 Grid Plate 017 Cleaning Pad 018 Cleaning Blade 019 Cleaning Brush SM Appendix 4-191 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 725 036 Pick - up Roller – Tray 4 037 Separation Roller – Tray 4 038 Feed Roller – LCT 039 Pick – up Roller - LCT 040 Separation Roller - LCT 041 Feed Belt Cover Feeder 042 Pick – up Roller Cover Feeder D062/D063/D065/D066 4-192 SM Appendix...
  • Page 726 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean. PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS Total: (Grand Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, Total). P, etc.).. Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application SM Appendix 4-193 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 727 SP that you do not understand. Key for Abbreviations ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application > More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more" AddBook Address Book Application Black & White Black D062/D063/D065/D066 4-194 SM Appendix...
  • Page 728 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1) IFax Internet Fax Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border ImgEdt removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc. Black (YMCK) Local Storage. Refers to the document server. SM Appendix 4-195 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 729 Print Pages Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currently not available. Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-196 SM Appendix...
  • Page 730 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job. Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish. Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer SM Appendix 4-197 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 731 When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments. When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments. When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-198 SM Appendix...
  • Page 732 8034 P:Pjob/DesApl [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8035 S:Pjob/DesApl The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. 8036 L:Pjob/DesApl 8037 O:Pjob/DesApl SM Appendix 4-199 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 733 The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within 8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl the document server mode screen at the operation panel. 8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter increments. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-200 SM Appendix...
  • Page 734 The finishing method is specified by the application. Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set 806x 1 Sort for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8066 1) SM Appendix 4-201 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 735 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-202 SM Appendix...
  • Page 736 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072). When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted. SM Appendix 4-203 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 737 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. S:Deliv Jobs/Svr 8145 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-204 SM Appendix...
  • Page 738 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job. 8171 T: Deliv Jobs/WSD Total jobs for WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services Devices). 8175 S: Deliv Jobs/WSD Total number of jobs scanned for WSD. SM Appendix 4-205 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 739 8201 T:LSize Scan PGS the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. 8205 S:LSize Scan PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-206 SM Appendix...
  • Page 740 Number of front sides fed for scanning: 8221 1 Front With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or SM Appendix 4-207 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 741 Selectable. Originals of non-standard size. Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on 8231 5 Platen the platen. If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-208 SM Appendix...
  • Page 742 PGS/Org operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1: Text 824x 2: Text/Photo 824x 3: Photo 824x 4: GenCopy, Pale 824x 5: Map SM Appendix 4-209 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 743 Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used. A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given. C:Scan 8252 PGS/ImgEdt L:Scan 8256 PGS/ImgEdt O:Scan 8257 PGS/ImgEdt D062/D063/D065/D066 4-210 SM Appendix...
  • Page 744 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442]. SM Appendix 4-211 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 745 830x 2 A4 830x 3 A5 830x 4 B4 830x 5 B5 830x 6 DLT 830x 7 LG 830x 8 LT 830x 9 HLT 830x 10 Full Bleed 830x 254 Other (Standard) 830x 255 Other (Custom) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-212 SM Appendix...
  • Page 746 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as 2. When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. SM Appendix 4-213 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 747 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count. This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 8411 Prints/Duplex page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-214 SM Appendix...
  • Page 748 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8427 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications SM Appendix 4-215 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 749 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count D062/D063/D065/D066 4-216 SM Appendix...
  • Page 750 Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The 843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2. The number of pages printed in series (one side) or 843x 2 Series/Book printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination. SM Appendix 4-217 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 751 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by other applications. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-218 SM Appendix...
  • Page 752 8451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 8451 2 Tray 1 Copier 8451 3 Tray 2 Copier 8451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option) SM Appendix 4-219 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 753 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 846x 1 Normal 846x 2 Recycled 846x 3 Special D062/D063/D065/D066 4-220 SM Appendix...
  • Page 754 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are counted. The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of 100%. 8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave 8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave SM Appendix 4-221 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 755 8514 3 PS3 8514 4 R98 8514 5 R16 8514 6 GL/GL2 8514 7 R55 8514 8 RTIFF 8514 9 PDF 8514 10 PCL5e/5c 8514 11 PCL XL 8514 12 IPDL-C 8514 13 BM-Links Japan Only D062/D063/D065/D066 4-222 SM Appendix...
  • Page 756 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 852x 1 Sort 852x 2 Stack SM Appendix 4-223 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 757 User Tools display on the copy machine. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. O:Counter 8591 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] D062/D063/D065/D066 4-224 SM Appendix...
  • Page 758 If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server). Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page SM Appendix 4-225 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 759 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this D062/D063/D065/D066 4-226 SM Appendix...
  • Page 760 For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12. 8701 1 PSTN-1 8701 2 PSTN-2 8701 3 PSTN-3 8701 4 ISDN (G3,G4) SM Appendix 4-227 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 761 8715 3 PDF 8715 4 Other 8721 T: Deliv: PGS/WSD Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services Devices). 8725 S: Deliv PGS/WSD Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services Devices). D062/D063/D065/D066 4-228 SM Appendix...
  • Page 762 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle. This SP displays the percent of space available on the document 8791 Memory server for storing documents. Remain [0 to 100/ 0 / 1] SM Appendix 4-229 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 763 Yellow toner Toner [0 to 9999999] 8861 Coverage These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and 11-20% other color toners. 8861 Black toner 8861 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-230 SM Appendix...
  • Page 764 [0 to 9999999] 8881 Coverage These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and 31 -% other color toners. 8881 Black toner 8881 Magenta toner Do not display for this machine. 8881 Cyan toner SM Appendix 4-231 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 765 Includes time while the machine is performing 8941 3 Energy Save Time background printing. Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. 8941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-232 SM Appendix...
  • Page 766 [0 to 255 / 0 / 255] 8951 9 Program the Program (job settings) feature. Scanner Scanner application registrations with 8951 10 Program the Program (job settings) feature. 4.1.3 PRINTER SP TABLES 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 SM Appendix 4-233 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 767 "Collate Type" configured. If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect. bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. D062/D063/D065/D066 4-234 SM Appendix...
  • Page 768 In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A" bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 1001 Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 1001 Bit Switch SM Appendix 4-235 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 769 Enable: the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs. The old models are below: - PCL: before October 2004 models D062/D063/D065/D066 4-236 SM Appendix...
  • Page 770 (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly. bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 SM Appendix 4-237 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 771 Clear setting Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode. 003 Delete Program DFU Print Summary 1004 Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets. 1005 Display Version. Printer Application Version D062/D063/D065/D066 4-238 SM Appendix...
  • Page 772 Erase Margin (Remote Scan) Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. 1005 If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. [0 to 5/ 0 /1 mm] 1009 Remote Scan Disable SM Appendix 4-239 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 773 This SP code sets the machine to release or not release the following items at job end] Destination (E-mail/Folder/CS) Sender name 1012 Mail Text Subject line File name [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 1: Release 0: Do not release 1013 Multi Media Func D062/D063/D065/D066 4-240 SM Appendix...
  • Page 774 8-bit table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left. SM Appendix 4-241 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 775 Front Side Fence Open Sensor Activated Deactivated Near End Sensor (see tables below) Paper Height 1 Sensor Paper Height 2 Sensor Paper Height 3 Sensor SP5803-002: Paper Feed 2 Reading Description 2nd Paper Size Switch See Paper Size Tables Below D062/D063/D065/D066 4-242 SM Appendix...
  • Page 776 SP5803-003: Paper Feed 3 Reading Description 3rd Paper Size Switch See Paper Size Tables Below. 3rd Paper Size Switch 3rd Paper Size Switch 3rd Paper Size Switch 3rd Paper Size Switch Not used Not used SM Appendix 4-243 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 777 81/4" x 13" HIGH HIGH HIGH 81/4" x 13" SEF A4 SEF HIGH HIGH HIGH A4 SEF A4 LEF HIGH HIGH A4 LEF 81/2" x 13" HIGH 81/2" x 13" SEF A5 SEF HIGH A5 SEF D062/D063/D065/D066 4-244 SM Appendix...
  • Page 778 Not Near End Japan only 2nd Paper Near End Near End Not Near End 3rd Paper Near End Near End Not Near End SP5803-005: Paper Feed 5 Reading Item Japan Only Right Tray Paper Sensor Present Not Present SM Appendix 4-245 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 779 SP5803-007: Paper Feed 7 Item 1st Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present Japan Only 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present 3rd Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present 1st Vertical Transport Sensor Present Not present Japan Only D062/D063/D065/D066 4-246 SM Appendix...
  • Page 780 3rd Paper End Sensor Paper No Paper SP5803-009: Paper Feed 9 Reading Description Not used Not used Switch not Toner Overflow SW Switch pressed pressed Switch not Toner Collection Bottle Set SW Switch pressed pressed Not used Not used SM Appendix 4-247 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 781 Exit Unit Set Not set Paper Exit Sensor Paper present Paper not present Exit Unit Entrance Sensor Paper present Paper not present Web End Sensor Not web end Web end SP5803-014: Duplex Description Reading Not used D062/D063/D065/D066 4-248 SM Appendix...
  • Page 782 Key Card Set Not set Development Motor Lock Not locked Locked Fusing/Exit Motor Lock Locked Not locked Drum Motor Lock Not locked Locked 60 CPM 75 CPM Not used Not used Not used SP5803-016: Lock Detection 2 SM Appendix 4-249 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 783 Copy Tray Full Sensor Not full Full Guide Plate Position Sensor Closed Open Paper not Relay Sensor Paper present present Paper not By-pass Paper End Sensor Paper present present Paper not Registration Sensor Paper present present D062/D063/D065/D066 4-250 SM Appendix...
  • Page 784 Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical component switched on for a long time. SM Appendix 4-251 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 785 017 Reverse Release SOL 1 018 Reverse Release SOL 2 019 Reverse Release SOL 3 020 Reverse Release SOL 4 022 Tandem Connection Release SOL 023 Left Tandem Lock SOL 024 Tandem Transport Motor 027 Relay Motor D062/D063/D065/D066 4-252 SM Appendix...
  • Page 786 052 Development Roller CL 053 Development Motor 054 Used Toner Motor 055 Web Motor 056 Toner Bottle Motor 057 Transfer/Separation SOL 062 Quenching Lamp 063 Charge Corona 064 Grid Wire 067 Development Bias 069 Transfer Bias SM Appendix 4-253 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 787 089 FIN Punch Motor 090 LD DC Lamp 092 FIN Tray Lift Motor 093 FIN Jogger Motor 094 FIN Staple Transport Motor 095 FIN Exhaust Motor 096 FIN Shift Motor 097 FIN Staple Slant Motor 098 Status Lamp (Green) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-254 SM Appendix...
  • Page 788 No paper Paper detected 007 Original Width Sensor 4 No paper Paper detected 008 Original Width Sensor 5 No paper Paper detected 009 Original Set Sensor No paper Paper detected 010 Separation Sensor No paper Paper detected SM Appendix 4-255 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 789 Off to switch off the output check currently executing. ADF Output Check 6008 Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. 001 Feed Motor: Forward 002 Feed Motor: Reverse 003 Transport Motor: Forward 004 Exit Motor: Forward 008 Stamp Solenoid D062/D063/D065/D066 4-256 SM Appendix...
  • Page 790 Input/Output Check 009 Pick-up Motor: Forward 010 Bottom Plate Motor: Reverse SM Appendix 4-257 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 791 Full 6140 12 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP 6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP 6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP 6140 15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not Paper detected D062/D063/D065/D066 4-258 SM Appendix...
  • Page 792 6140 29 Punch Selection DIPSW 2 See * Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed 6140 30 Not HP HP Sensor Paper not 6140 31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper detected detected 6140 32 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP SM Appendix 4-259 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 793 Staple detected detected Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Staple not 6140 45 Staple detected Detection: Rear detected 6140 46 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full 6140 47 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front Not used in the machine D062/D063/D065/D066 4-260 SM Appendix...
  • Page 794 002 Upper Feed Motor purposes. 003 Lower Feed Motor 004 Exit Motor 005 Knock Roller Motor 006 Shift Motor 007 Exit Guide Plate Open / Close Motor 008 Tray Lift Motor 009 Stack Roller Motor SM Appendix 4-261 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 795 024 Folder Plate Motor 025 Folder Roller Motor 026 Clamp Roller Motor 027 Punch Motor 028 Punch Moving Motor 029 Punch Registration Detection Motor 030 Exit Jogger Motor: Front 031 Exit Jogger Motor: Rear 032 Exit Jogger Release Motor D062/D063/D065/D066 4-262 SM Appendix...
  • Page 796 014 Punch Unit Sensor 015 Punch HP1 Sensor 016 Punch Chad Full Sensor 017 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple 018 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift 019 Stapler Cartridge Set Sensor 020 Proof Full Sensor 021 Staple Moving HP Sensor SM Appendix 4-263 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 797 035 Shift Jogger Sensor 036 Shift Jogger HP Sensor 037 Shift Jogger Release HP Sensor 038 Front Door Safety Switch 039 Top Fence HP Sensor 040 Bottom Fence HP Sensor 041 Lower Tray Full Sn (Z-Folded Paper) D062/D063/D065/D066 4-264 SM Appendix...
  • Page 798 See "Finisher 2 Output 016 Hold Motor Check: SP6125" 017 Pre-stack Solenoid 018 Guide Solenoid 019 Stapler Release Solenoid 020 Front Hold Motor 021 Rear Hold Motor Turn on the electrical components of SM Appendix 4-265 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 799 008 Jogger Fence HP Sensorr 009 Positioning Roller HP Sensor 010 1st Stopper Paper Sensor 011 1st Stopper HP Sensor 012 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor 013 2nd Stopper HP Sensor 014 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor 015 3rd Stopper HP Sensor D062/D063/D065/D066 4-266 SM Appendix...
  • Page 800 002 Top Tray Transport Motor individually for test purposes. 003 Top Tray Exit Motor 004 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor 005 Registration Roller Transport Motor 007 Entrance JG Motor 008 1st Stopper Motor 009 2nd Sopper Motor 010 3rd Stopper Motor SM Appendix 4-267 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 801 019 2nd Fold Motor components of the finisher 020 Crease Motor individually for test purposes. 021 Bypass JG Solenoid 022 Exit JG Solenoid 023 Top Tray JG Solenoid 024 LE Stop Pawl Solenoid 025 Reverse JG Solenoid D062/D063/D065/D066 4-268 SM Appendix...
  • Page 802 There are 8 bits from 7 bit to 0 bit. Changed 1 For example, if you would like Chinese model to detect Chinese paper sizes 8K and 16K, the setting would be as follows: Push the 2, 1, and 0 number keys once. SM Appendix 4-269 D062/D063/D065/D066...
  • Page 804 D062/D063/D065/D066 SERVICE MANUAL (Book 2 of 2) 004778MIU ACCESSORIES...

  • Page 808: Service Manual

    D062/D063/D065/D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 2 of 2 ACCESSORIES 004778MIU...
  • Page 810 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 812 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 814 LD360sp MP 6001 SP 9060sp D063 MP 7001/ LD370/ Aficio MP 7001/ 9070/ MP 7001SP LD370sp MP 7001 SP 9070sp D065 MP 8001/ LD380/ Aficio MP 8001/ 9080/ MP 8001SP LD380sp MP 8001 SP 9080sp D066 MP 9001/ LD390/ Aficio MP 9001/...

  • Page 816: Large Capacity Tray

    LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y Page Dat e Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 818 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS .................. 1 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS........... 2 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID ................... 3 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES......... 4 1.5 TRAY MOTOR....................5 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR ................5 1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT ...............

  • Page 820: Replacement And Adjustment

    EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS B473R001.WMF [A]: Transport cover [B]: Transport cover hinge ( x 1) [C]: Rear cover ( x 4) [D]: Top cover ( x 1) [E]: Right cover ( x 2) [F]: Front cover ( x 3) B473...

  • Page 821: Pick-Up/Feed/Separation Rollers

    PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS 1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS B473R002.WMF B473R003.WMF [A]: Open the transport cover [B]: Bracket cover ( x 2) [C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1) [D]: Feed roller ( x 1) [E]: Separation roller ( x 1) B473...

  • Page 822: Pick-Up Solenoid

    PICK-UP SOLENOID 1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID B473R004.WMF Rear cover ( x 4) Open the transport cover ( 1.2) Bracket cover ( 1.2) [A]: Pick-up solenoid ( x 2,  x 1) B473...

  • Page 823: Paper End Sensor, Upper Cover Switches

    PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES 1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES B473R005.WMF B473R006.WMF Open the top cover. Right cover ( 1.1) [A]: Paper end sensor ( x 1) [B]: Upper cover switches 1, 2 ( x 2) B473...

  • Page 824: Tray Motor

    TRAY MOTOR 1.5 TRAY MOTOR B473R007.WMF Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]: Tray motor ( x 2,  x 1) 1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR B473R008.WMF Disconnect the LCT from the machine [A]: Sensor cover ( x 1) [B]: Paper stack sensor ( x 1) B473...

  • Page 825: Paper Size Adjustment

    PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT 1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT B473R109.WMF The side fences [A] can be adjusted for A4 Sideways, B5 Sideways, or LT sideways at the top [B] and bottom brackets [C]. After changing the side fences to accept another paper size, you must execute SP5959 005 (Paper Type –...

  • Page 826: Details

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS B473D001.WMF 1. Separation Roller 10. Paper Height Sensor 2 2. Transport Roller 11. Paper Tray 3. Feed Sensor 12. Paper Height Sensor 3 4. Feed Roller 13. Paper Tray Motor 5. Lift Sensor 14.
  • Page 827 OVERVIEW Pick-up, Separation, Feed. Non-contact, maintenance free FRR sysem. ( Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR)) Tray Lift. Tray lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray. Paper Size Detection. The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers. The paper size must be entered with SP5959 005.

  • Page 828: Lct Drive Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT B473D003.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Separation Roller 3. Transport Rollers 4. Feed Roller 5. Feed Motor 6. Tray Motor 7. Tray Lift Shaft 8. Tray Drive Belt B473...

  • Page 829: Paper Feed And Separation

    PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION 2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION A standard FRR system is used. It consists of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers. 2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED B473D004.WMF The feed motor [A] drives the transport rollers [B]. The separation roller [C], which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow, remains at rest.

  • Page 830: Feed And Separation

    PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION 2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION B473D005.WMF The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]. The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack.

  • Page 831: Paper Lift

    PAPER LIFT 2.3 PAPER LIFT B473D006.WMF B473D158.WMF Tray motor [A] → Gear [B] → Shaft [C] → Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper tray [E]. After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops.
  • Page 832 PAPER LIFT B473D108.WMF Pressing the tray down button [A] reverses the rotation of the tray motor [B] and lowers the tray [C]. The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the tray motor. •...

  • Page 833: Paper Height Detection

    PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION 2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION B473D006.WMF As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the paper near end sensor [F].

  • Page 834: Paper End Detection

    PAPER END DETECTION 2.5 PAPER END DETECTION B473D111.WMF The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack. When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals paper end.
  • Page 836 3000-SHEET FINISHER/JOGGER UNIT/PUNCH UNIT B478/B513/B531 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y Page Dat e Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 838 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT B513/PUNCH UNIT B531 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............2 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........3 3.1 DOOR AND COVER ..................3 Front Door....................3 Left Inner Cover ..................3 Inner Cover ....................3 Side Table and Upper Tray..............4 Left Covers ....................
  • Page 839 Front to Rear Adjustment............... 23 Right to Left Adjustment................. 23 3.9 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)..............24 3.9.1 JOGGER UNIT .................. 24 3.9.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB................25 3.9.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR..............26 4. TROUBLESHOOTING ..............27 5. SERVICE TABLES.................28 5.1 DIP SWITCHES..................28 5.2 TEST POINTS ....................

  • Page 840: Installation

    INSTALLATION 1. INSTALLATION For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478, please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service manual. B513/B531...

  • Page 841: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478 PM table, please refer to Section “2. Preventive Maintenance” in the main Service Manual. B513/B531...

  • Page 842: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 DOOR AND COVER B478R502.WMF B478R505.WMF Front Door 1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1). 2. Remove the front door [B]. Left Inner Cover 1. Remove the front door. 2. Remove the left inner cover [C] ( x 1).

  • Page 843: Side Table And Upper Tray

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Side Table and Upper Tray B478R503.WMF 1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it. 2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C]. B513/B531...

  • Page 844: Left Covers

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B478R504.WMF B478R501.WMF Left Covers 1. Remove the left upper panel [A]. 2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2, x 2). 3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See “Front Door and Left Inner Cover Replacement”.) 4.

  • Page 845: Rollers

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.2 ROLLERS 3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER B478R522.WMF 1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out. 2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each) B513/B531...

  • Page 846: Positioning Roller

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER B478R506.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the snap ring [A]. 3. Release the rubber belt [B]. 4. Replace the positioning roller [C]. B513/B531...

  • Page 847: Alignment Brush Roller

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER B478R507.WMF B478R508.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8). 4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and release the tension of the timing belt.

  • Page 848: Stack Feed-Out Belt

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT B478R523.WMF B478R524.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2). 4. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, clamp x 1).

  • Page 849: Jogger Fence

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.4 JOGGER FENCE B478R525.WMF 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit. 3. Push both fences to the center. 4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1) 5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1).

  • Page 850: Sensors

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5 SENSORS 3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR B478R509.WMF Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 1. Remove the top cover. ( 3.1) 2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).

  • Page 851: Upper Tray Paper Limit And Exit Sensor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR B478R510.WMF Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2). 3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1). 4.

  • Page 852: Shift Tray Exit Sensor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR B478R511.WMF B478R512.WMF 1. Remove the top cover. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the inner cover. 4. Release the upper exit guide springs [A] (x 2). 5. Disconnect the link [B] from the cam ( x 1).

  • Page 853: Entrance And Stapler Tray Entrance Sensors

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS B478R513.WMF B478R514.WMF Entrance Sensor 1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier. 2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). 3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1). Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 1.

  • Page 854: Pre-Stack Paper Sensor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR B478R521.WMF B478R515.WMF B478R516.WMF 1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the main board [A] ( x 8, x all). 3. Release the guide [B] ( x 2). 4. Open the front door. 5. Remove the left vertical transport guide [C]. 6.

  • Page 855: Staple Waste Hopper Sensor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR B478R517.WMF 1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the rear cover ( x 2). 3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 856: Stapler Rotation Hp And Stapler Return Sensors

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS B478R519.WMF 1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.) 2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] ( x 4, springs x 2). 3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1).

  • Page 857: Stapler

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.6 STAPLER B478R518.WMF 1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray. 2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A]. 3. Remove the stapler cover [B] ( x 1, x 2). 4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs [C]. B513/B531...

  • Page 858: Shift Tray Motor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT SHIFT TRAY MOTOR B478R531.WMF 1. Remove the front door and rear cover ( 3.1). 2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 3) B513/B531...

  • Page 859: Stacking Roller/Roller Drag Motors, Return Hp Sensor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER/ROLLER DRAG MOTORS, RETURN HP SENSOR B478R526.WMF 1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]). NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift tray must be down.
  • Page 860 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B478R527.WMF B478R528.WMF 6. Remove the end fence [A] and plate [B] ( x 2). 7. Disengage the end fence races [C] from the rollers [D] behind the fence. 8. Remove the upper stay [E] ( x 4). 9.
  • Page 861 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B478R530.WMF B478R529.WMF 12. Remove the stacking motor bracket [A] (bushing x 1, x 1). 13. Remove the stacking motor [B] ( x 2). 14. Remove the roller drag motor bracket [C] ( x 2). 15. Remove return HP sensor [D]. 16.

  • Page 862: Punch Unit B531 (Option)

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.8 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) 3.8.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT B531R101.WMF The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways. Front to Rear Adjustment Three spacers [A] are provided with the punch unit for manual adjustment of the hole position in the main scan direction: •...

  • Page 863: Jogger Unit B513 (Option)

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.9 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION) 3.9.1 JOGGER UNIT B513I002.WMF B513R003.WMF 1. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] ( x 2). 2. Remove the jogger unit [B] ( x 2, x 1). B513/B531...

  • Page 864: Jogger Unit Pcb

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.9.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB B513R001.WMF 1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 3.9.1) 2. Remove the jogger unit control PCB [A] ( x 2, x 3). B513/B531...

  • Page 865: Jogger Unit Motor

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.9.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR B513R002.WMF 1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 3.9.1) 2. Remove the shift jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1). 3. Remove the shift jogger lift motor [B] ( x 2, x 1).

  • Page 866: Troubleshooting

    TROUBLESHOOTING 4. TROUBLESHOOTING If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see “Section 4 Troubleshooting” of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem. B513/B531...

  • Page 867: Service Tables

    SERVICE TABLES 5. SERVICE TABLES For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B478 SP codes, please refer to “5. Service Tables” in the main machine service manual. 5.1 DIP SWITCHES DPS100 Description Default Free run: A4 LEF, staple mode Free run: staple and tray shift NOTE: Do not use any other settings.

  • Page 868: Details

    DETAILS 6. DETAILS 6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE Upper Tray Mode B478D506.WMF Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode B478D505.WMF B478D507.WMF Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates. Selected Operation Mode Solenoid/Gate Upper Tray...

  • Page 869: Paper Pre-Stacking

    DETAILS 6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING B478D000.WMF This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF). During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.

  • Page 870: Jogger Unit Paper Positioning

    DETAILS 6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING B478D508.WMF In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of the stack is aligned correctly for stapling. Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.

  • Page 871: Stapler Unit Movement

    DETAILS 6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT B478D513.WMF Side-to-Side The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position. If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at the front.

  • Page 872: Rotation (1)

    DETAILS B478D514.WMF B478D523.WMF B478D515.WMF Rotation (1) In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the stapler units [B] 45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position. Rotation (2) When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge [C].

  • Page 873: Stapler

    DETAILS 6.5 STAPLER B478D521.WMF B478D516.WMF B478D522.WMF When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling. During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering the cutter [C].
  • Page 874 DETAILS B478D518.WMF B478D517.WMF The stapler has a staple end sensor [A], cartridge set sensor [B] and staple hammer HP sensor [C]. When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.

  • Page 875: Feed-Out

    DETAILS 6.6 FEED-OUT B478D519.WMF B478D512.WMF After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly.

  • Page 876: Paper Exit Stacking

    DETAILS 6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING B478D524.WMF The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C]. The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt.

  • Page 877: Shift Tray

    DETAILS 6.8 SHIFT TRAY 6.8.1 OVERVIEW B478D010.WMF The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through gears and timing belts [C]. Stand-by Mode After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on.

  • Page 878: Shift Tray Up/Down Movement

    DETAILS 6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT B478D010.WMF Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [F] has just exited the shift mode home position sensor [G] (S12). During feed-out, the tray is lowered automatically at prescribed intervals;...

  • Page 879: Shift Tray Lower Limit Detection

    DETAILS 6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION B478D010.WMF This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9) for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper (smaller than B4). NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used.

  • Page 880: Shift Tray Side-To-Side Movement

    DETAILS 6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT B478D520.WMF In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of copies. The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift gear disk [C].

  • Page 881: Jam Conditions

    DETAILS 6.10 JAM CONDITIONS 1. The entrance sensor does not turn on when the copier has fed paper 426 mm after the copier exit sensor turned off. 2. The entrance sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned on.

  • Page 882: Punch Unit B531 (Option)

    DETAILS 6.11 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) 6.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE B531D102.WMF The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel. The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned by the punch motor [B].

  • Page 883: Punch Waste Collection

    DETAILS 6.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION B531D103.WMF Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch unit. When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied.

  • Page 884: Jogger Unit B513 (Option)

    DETAILS 6.12 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION) 6.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT B513D003.WMF 1. Shift Jogger Fence Lift Motor 2. Shift Jogger Motor Timing Belt 3. Shift Jogger Motor 4. Shift Jogger Fence Timing Belt 5. Shift Jogger Fences 6. Shift Jogger HP Sensor 7.

  • Page 885: Jogger Unit Drive

    DETAILS 6.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE B513D002.WMF At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges. At the end of the job, the jogger fence lift motor [F] switches on and raises the fences until the actuator [G] leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor [H] and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor.

  • Page 886: Overall Machine Information

    OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B478V500.WMF 1. Upper Tray 12. Stack Plate 2. Middle Transport Rollers 13. Staple Waste Hopper 3. Upper Tray Exit Roller 14. Stapler 4. Upper Transport Rollers 15. Alignment Brush Roller 5.

  • Page 887: Electrical Component Description

    OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Motors Drives the exit roller for the shift tray. Shift Tray Exit Shift Tray Lift Moves the shift tray up or down. Opens and closes the upper exit guide. Exit Guide Drives the lower transport rollers, the positioning Lower Transport roller and the alignment brush roller...
  • Page 888 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Symbol Name Function Detects when the paper stack height in the upper Upper Tray Limit tray is at its upper limit. Shift Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds at the shift tray exit. Exit Guide Open Detects whether the guide plate is opened or not. Detects the shift tray home position for standby Staple Mode HP 1 mode and for staple mode.
  • Page 889 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Symbol Name Function SOLENOIDS (Upper) Tray Junction Drives the tray junction gate. SOL1 Gate SOL2 Stapler Junction Gate Drives the stapler junction gate. SOL3 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Drives the pre-stack junction gate. SOL4 Pre-stack Paper Stopper Drives the stopper pawl of the pre-stacking tray. Positions the stapler correctly on its return from the SOL5 Stapler Return...

  • Page 890: Drive Layout

    OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT B478V503.WMF B478V504.WMF 1. Upper Transport Roller 2 14. Lower Transport Roller 1 2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 15. Transport Roller 1 3. Lower Transport Roller 2 16. Entrance Roller 2 4. Shift Tray Lift Motor 17.
  • Page 892 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 894 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS .................. 1 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ............2 1.3 FEED BELT ....................3 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT..............4 1.5 MAIN BOARD....................5 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT ................6 1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR............

  • Page 896: Replacement And Adjustment

    EXTERNAL COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS B470R001.WMF [A]: Open the feed cover. [B]: Upper front cover ( x 2) NOTE: To remove the upper front cover, screw [C] must be removed. [D]: Rear upper cover ( x 2) [E]: Slip sheet tray (...

  • Page 897: Feed Unit And Pick-Up Roller

    FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER 1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER B470R002.WMF B470R003.WMF Open the feed cover. [A]: Feed unit • The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out. [B]: Pick-up roller ( x 2, bushings x 2) B704...

  • Page 898: Feed Belt

    FEED BELT 1.3 FEED BELT B470R004.WMF B470R005.WMF Feed unit ( 1.2) [A]: Pick-up roller unit. • Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow. [B]: Feed belt holder • Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the holder.

  • Page 899: Guide Plate Adjustment

    GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT 1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT B470R151.WMF Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets. 1. Open the feed cover. 2. Loosen the screw [A]. 3.

  • Page 900: Main Board

    MAIN BOARD 1.5 MAIN BOARD B470R101.WMF Open the top cover. Rear cover ( x 1) [A]: Main board ( x 9,  x 4) NOTE: All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be set to OFF.

  • Page 901: Motor Replacement

    MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR B470R102.WMF Open the top cover. Rear middle cover ( x 1) ( 1.1) [A]: Motor bracket ( x 1, harness x 1,  x 2, timing belt x 1) [B]: Motor ( x 2) 1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR B470R104.WMF Rear upper cover (...

  • Page 902: Feed Motor, Transport Motor

    MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR B470R105.WMF B470R103.WMF Rear upper cover ( 1.1) NOTE: When removing the feed gear and transport gear, hold one hand under the gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft. [A]: Feed gear (...

  • Page 903: Details

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT B470D001.WMF 1. Support tray 2. Slip sheet tray 3. Pick-up roller 4. Feed belt 5. Separation roller 6. Grip roller B704...

  • Page 904: Drive Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B470D003.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4. Feed Motor 5. Transport Motor 6. Timing Belt 7. Vertical Transport Motor B704...

  • Page 905: Paper Size Detection

    OVERVIEW 2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION The width sensors [A] (S1, S2, S3) and length sensors [B] (S4, S5, S6) detect the width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray. DLT SEF A3 SEF 8 K SEF B4 SEF 10"x14"...
  • Page 906 OVERVIEW The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size. A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF 11" x 17" 10" x 14" SEF " x 14" " x 13" " x 11" 11"...
  • Page 907 OVERVIEW B064 series: Paper Size Detection North America Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded for feeding from the cover interposer tray. To Select for Loaded Display (Default) Enter Display " x 13" "...

  • Page 908: Paper Path

    OVERVIEW 2.1.4 PAPER PATH B470D006.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Feed Belt 3. Separation Roller 4. Grip Roller 5. Transport Roller 1 6. Transport Roller 2 The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into the paper path to the finisher below.

  • Page 909: Paper Feed

    PAPER FEED 2.2 PAPER FEED B470D005.WMF Power On When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor [C] and switches the motor off.

  • Page 910: Bin Mailbox

    9-BIN MAILBOX B762 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y Page Dat e Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 912 9-BIN MAILBOX B762 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS................. 1 1.2 SENSORS....................2 1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD ............. 3 2. DETAILS ................... 4 2.1 OVERVIEW ....................4 2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT ............4 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ..................

  • Page 914: Replacement And Adjustment

    COVERS AND TRAYS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and procedure in this section. 1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS B471R001.WMF [A]: Trays • Grip each tray by the front and lift out. [B]: Front cover (...

  • Page 915: Sensors

    SENSORS 1.2 SENSORS B471R003.WMF B471R104.WMF Remove the tray ( 1.1) [A]: Bin cover [B]: Tray sensor ( x 1) [C]: Tray overflow sensor ( x 1) [D]: Vertical transport sensor ( x 1) • Raise the pawl, then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove. B762...

  • Page 916: Main Motor And Control Board

    MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD 1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD B471R002.WMF Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]: Control board ( x 3,  x 17) [B]: Main motor bracket (main motor  x 1,  x 2) [C]: Timing belt [D]: Main motor (...

  • Page 917: Details

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT B471D003.WMF 1. Bins (x 9) 2. Vertical Transport Rollers (x 5) 3. Turn Gates (x 8) 4. Exit Rollers (x 9) The trays are 1 to 9 (bottom to top). The numbers are clearly marked on the side of the unit.

  • Page 918: Drive Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B471D002.WMF 1. Main Motor 2. Main Timing Belt 3. Timing Belt B762...

  • Page 919: Paper Path

    OVERVIEW 2.1.3 PAPER PATH B471D970.WMF 1. Original Paper Path 2. Vertical Transport Path 3. LCT Feed 4. Selected Trays 5. Turn Gates 6. Mailbox Paper Path 7. Junction Gate (paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher’s proof tray) The solenoid for the junction gate (7) is part of the mailbox.

  • Page 920: Basic Operation

    BASIC OPERATION 2.2 BASIC OPERATION 2.2.1 PAPER PATH B471D004.WMF B471D105.WMF The unit is mounted on top the finisher and connected to the finisher by a 14-pin connector. When the leading edge of the paper passes and activates the entrance sensor of the finisher, the mailbox main motor switches on and the mailbox vertical transport rollers [A] begin to turn.

  • Page 921: Overflow Detection

    OVERFLOW DETECTION 2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION 2.3.1 OVERVIEW B471D005.WMF An overflow sensor [A] and actuator [B] are above the exit of each paper tray. The actuator, mounted on a swivel arm, remains in contact with the top of the stack. The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor. Then, a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts.

  • Page 922: Detection Timing

    OVERFLOW DETECTION 2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING Between Sheets Full (High) Not Full (Low) Paper Paper Paper Full Length Length Length B471D010.WMF When the mailbox exit sensor goes high for the prescribed time (T), the machine determines that the tray is full. The value of T is calculated, regardless of paper size, as follows: T (s) = (60/s x max.

  • Page 923: Paper Misfeed Detection Timing

    PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING 2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING 2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) → 1ST BIN TRAY Main Motor (Main Unit) Exit Sensor Main Motor (Mailbox) Turn Gate (SOL 1) *1: Time required for A4 LEF B471D011.WMF 2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) → 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY Main Motor (Main Unit) Exit Sensor...
  • Page 924 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING J1 Timing: After the leading edge of the sheet activates the mailbox exit sensor, a misfeed is detected if the sensor does not switch off within: X+0.5 s Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass the sensor.
  • Page 926 FINISHER SR4010/SR4040/SR4020/SR4030 D373/D374 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...
  • Page 928 FINISHER SR4010/SR4040/SR4020/ SR4030 D373/D374 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS....................... 1 1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ................1 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ............... 2 1.2 MAIN UNIT....................3 1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH........3 1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER ..............4 1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR.............
  • Page 929 2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................22 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............24 2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......... 28 2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT................. 38 2.2 JUNCTION GATES..................40 2.2.1 PROOF MODE .................. 40 2.2.2 SHIFT MODE..................40 2.2.3 STAPLE MODE ................. 41 2.3 PRE-STACKING ..................42 2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM ..............
  • Page 930 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 932: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS 1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS Open the front door [D]. Small upper cover [A] ( Upper cover [B] ( Front door bracket [C] ( Front door [D] Front left side cover [E] ( Cover [F] Paper exit cover [G] ( Rear cover [H] ( D373/D374...

  • Page 933: Upper Tray, End Fence

    Covers 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE Remove the rear cover. (* "Exterior Covers") Support the tray [A] with your right hand. Pull gear [B] toward you to release. Slowly lower the tray until it stops. Front side cover [C] ( Rear side cover [D] ( Upper tray [E] ( Tray bracket [F] (...

  • Page 934: Main Unit

    Main Unit 1.2 MAIN UNIT 1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover") End fence ( 1.1.2 "Upper Tray, End Fence") Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( Upper tray limit sensor [B] ( Upper tray limit switch [C] ( D373/D374...

  • Page 935: Positioning Roller

    Main Unit 1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER Open the front door [A]. Pull out the stapling unit [B]. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1) 1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR Small upper cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Cover") Proof tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( D373/D374...

  • Page 936: Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor

    Main Unit Proof tray exit sensor [B] ( 1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 Small upper cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Cover") Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( Upper tray paper height sensor [B] – staple mode (S08) ( Upper tray paper height sensor [C] –...

  • Page 937: Proof Tray Full Sensor

    Main Unit Exit guide plate [B] ( x1, Link and spring, Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) ( 1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR Exit guide plate. ( 1.2.5 "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor") Guide plate [A] (hook x 2) Sensor bracket [B] ( Proof tray full sensor [C] (S11) ( D373/D374...

  • Page 938: Finisher Entrance Sensor

    Main Unit 1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. Sensor bracket [A] ( Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) ( 1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. Sensor bracket [A] Pre-stack tray exit sensor [B] (S2) D373/D374...

  • Page 939: Stapler Unit

    Stapler Unit 1.3 STAPLER UNIT 1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit. Inner cover [A] ( Stapler unit holder [B] ( Corner stapler [C] (M20) ( D373/D374...

  • Page 940: Positioning Roller

    Stapler Unit 1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER Open the front door [A]. Pull out the stapling unit [B]. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1) D373/D374...

  • Page 941: Fold Unit

    Fold Unit 1.4 FOLD UNIT 1.4.1 FOLD UNIT Remove the back cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Covers"). Open the front door. The stapler unit is heavy. Ground cable [A] ( Harness [B] ( Stapler unit [C] ( D373/D374...
  • Page 942 Fold Unit Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling. The fold unit is heavy. Folding unit [D] ( If you have replaced the folding unit: Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.

  • Page 943: Fold Unit Entrance Sensor

    Fold Unit 1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.3.2 "Positioning Roller"). Fold unit entrance sensor bracket [A] ( Fold unit entrance sensor [B] (S26) ( 1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.3.2 "Positioning Roller").

  • Page 944: Stack Present Sensor

    Fold Unit Fold unit upper cover [C] ( Paper clamp mechanism [D] ( Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] ( Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) ( 1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor.

  • Page 945: Folding Horizontal Skew Adjustment (For B804 Only)

    Fold Unit Guide plate [A]. Stay [B] ( Left plate [C] ( Sensor bracket [D] ( Stack present sensor [E] (S32) ( 1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory.
  • Page 946 Fold Unit Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher. Open the guide plate [B]. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.) Remove the lock screw [D]. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its own weight.
  • Page 947 Fold Unit 15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out. 16. Open the guide plate [I]. 17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test sheet.

  • Page 948: Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment (For B804 Only)

    Fold Unit 1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even. Switch the copier on. Do a folding test.
  • Page 949 Fold Unit D373/D374...

  • Page 950: Booklet Stapler Unit

    Booklet Stapler Unit 1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT 1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.2.2 "Positioning Roller"). Harness cover [A] ( Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( Stapler [C] ( 1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR Open the front door.
  • Page 951 Booklet Stapler Unit Stay [A] ( x4). Left plate [B] ( Harness cover [C] ( Booklet stapler support stay [D] ( Booklet stapler [E] ( Booklet stapler motor [F] ( To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor Reattach the booklet stapler motor. Do not tighten the screws.
  • Page 952 Booklet Stapler Unit Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay. This tool is included with the stapler spare part. Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops. Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor. Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.

  • Page 953: Detailed Section Descriptions

    Component Layout 2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT 1. Proof Tray Junction Gate 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)* 2. Punch Unit 8. Folder Rollers* 3. Stapler Junction Gate 9. Folder Plate* 4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate 10. Booklet Stapler* 5.

  • Page 954: Component Layout

    Component Layout : B804 Only Paper direction The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters the finisher: Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray...

  • Page 955: Electrical Components

    Component Layout 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Upper Area B804/B805 1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) 10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2) 2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13) (SOL2) 12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10) 3. Upper Transport Motor (M2) 13.
  • Page 956 Component Layout Lower Area B804/B805 8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14) 1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) 9. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)* 2. Lower Transport Motor (M3) 10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)* 3. Entrance Motor (M1) 11.
  • Page 957 Component Layout Punch Unit B702 1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) 6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22) 2. Punch Drive Motor (M24) 7. Paper Position Sensor (S3) 3. Punch HP Sensor (S24) 8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) 4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3) 9.
  • Page 958 Component Layout Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805 7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15) 1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) 2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* 9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6) 3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 10.

  • Page 959: Summary Of Electrical Components

    Component Layout B804 Fold unit 1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) 6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30) 2. Fold Roller Motor (M12) 7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28) 3. Fold Plate Motor (M11) 8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26) 4.
  • Page 960 Component Layout Component Function Boards (PCB) PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing. PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit. Motors Finisher Entrance Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch Motor waste transport belt of the punch unit.
  • Page 961 Component Layout Component Function are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance (3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence positions the stack for folding and while the stack is folded by the fold rollers.
  • Page 962 Component Layout Component Function lowers the stack 10 mm below the fold position, and then raises it to the fold position. Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction gate at the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is Stack Junction Gate open, it directs the ascending stack to the upper tray if it Motor...
  • Page 963 Component Layout Component Function Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the stapling tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when Pre-stack Tray Exit the copier is switched on. (This sensor performs no Sensor timing function. The entire flow of paper through the pre-stacking mechanism is controlled by motor pulse counts.) The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and...
  • Page 964 Component Layout Component Function This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height Upper Tray Paper sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This Height Sensor (Staple sensor detects the paper height of the stack in the upper Mode) tray when the copier is operating in the staple mode.
  • Page 965 Component Layout Component Function back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the bottom of the stack aligned. A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the Stapling Tray Paper stapling tray. When this sensor detects paper, the Sensor bottom fence motor raises or lowers the bottom fence to position the selected paper size for booklet stapling.
  • Page 966 Component Layout Component Function B804: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher. There is only one upper tray full sensor (S18). Upper Tray Full B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the Sensor (B805 only) lower tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper.
  • Page 967 Component Layout Component Function Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the Fold Bottom Fence HP folding unit using pulse counts based on the size of the Sensor paper selected for the job to position the stack correctly for feeding. Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this sensor controls the movement of the fold plate .
  • Page 968 Component Layout Component Function sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.) This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray full sensor pair.

  • Page 969: Drive Layout

    Component Layout Component Function Switches Front Door Safety The safety switch cuts the dc power when the front door Switch is opened. A micro-switch cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This switch Upper Tray Limit SW duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor (S12) and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.
  • Page 970 Component Layout 1. Upper Transport Motor (M2) 6. Folder Plate Motor* (M11) 2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) 7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14) 3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) 8. Lower Transport Motor (M3) 4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5) 9. Entrance Motor (M1) 5.

  • Page 971: Junction Gates

    Junction Gates 2.2 JUNCTION GATES The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher. 2.2.1 PROOF MODE Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed. The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.

  • Page 972: Staple Mode

    Junction Gates 2.2.3 STAPLE MODE Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling. D373/D374...

  • Page 973: Pre-Stacking

    Pre-Stacking 2.3 PRE-STACKING This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that contain three pages. [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
  • Page 974 Pre-Stacking In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time. In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time. D373/D374...

  • Page 975: Tray Movement Mechanism

    Tray Movement Mechanism 2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM 2.4.1 UPPER TRAY [A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor [B]: Upper Feeler [C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 (Staple Mode) [D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 (Non-Staple Mode) [E]: Lower Feeler [F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor [G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch [H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at...
  • Page 976 Tray Movement Mechanism A4, LT. Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A]. Upper Tray Raising and Lowering Sensors, Switch Action Operation Mode Stops the lift motor at the standby position when the actuator of the upper Standby feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is (Non-Staple...

  • Page 977: Lower Tray (B804 Only)

    Tray Movement Mechanism When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT) The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804.
  • Page 978 Tray Movement Mechanism If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF), the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When booklet mode is selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel. The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises determines the number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
  • Page 979 Tray Movement Mechanism Lower Tray Full Condition Table A3 (DLT) 1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht … Full 1 3 Cnt — — — — — — — —...

  • Page 980: Corner Stapling

    Corner Stapling 2.5 CORNER STAPLING 2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING [A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15) [B]: Jogger Fences [C]: Positioning Roller [D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) [E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4) [F]: Pressure Plate At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).

  • Page 981: Stapler Movement

    Corner Stapling size. This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence. This aligns the edge of the stack. Next, the jogger fence motor: Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the stack to align the sides of the stack.
  • Page 982 Corner Stapling The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes: Front 1 staple Rear 1 staple Rear diagonal staple Rear/Front 2 staples The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its stainless steel rail.

  • Page 983: Corner Stapling

    Corner Stapling 2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires the stapler [C]. The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position. The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition. D373/D374...

  • Page 984: Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) 2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM [A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5) [B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm [C]: Booklet Pressure Roller As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed out belt moves.

  • Page 985: Booklet Stapling And Folding

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING Overview 1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller 13. Corner Stapler (M20) 2. Stack Present Sensor (S32) 14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14) 3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 15. Feed Out Belt 4.
  • Page 986 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet.
  • Page 987 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops.
  • Page 988 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2]. The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4]. With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.
  • Page 989 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers.
  • Page 990 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position. The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray.

  • Page 991: Booklet Stapling And Folding Mechanisms

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS Booklet Stapler [A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position. [B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear [C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front Stack Junction Gate [D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam. [E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam.
  • Page 992 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) Clamp Roller [A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller as well as the fold rollers (see next page). [B]: Clamp Rollers. Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed.
  • Page 993 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) Fold Plate [A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers. [B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate. [C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).

  • Page 994: Upper Tray Output

    Upper Tray Output 2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.7.1 FEED OUT [A]: Feed Out Belt Motor [B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt [C]: Pawl [D]: Exit Rollers [E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor [F]: Exit Guide Plate [G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor [H]: Upper Tray After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B].

  • Page 995: Feed Out Stacking

    Upper Tray Output The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high. Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position sensor and switches off the motor. There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out operation.

  • Page 996: Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) 2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) 2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION Skew Correction before Punching This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time. Paper feeds out of the copier.
  • Page 997 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) Punch Unit Position Correction These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment. The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A]. The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the paper.

  • Page 998: Punch Mechanisms

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment: SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed. SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. For more, see Section "Service Tables". 2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection D373/D374...
  • Page 999 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Finisher Entrance Roller [C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1) [D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7) [E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27) [F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from the copier into the finisher.
  • Page 1000 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9) [B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21) [C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the correct position for punching. The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.

  • Page 1001: Punch Hopper Mechanism

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F]. When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder detects the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching. This is the ‘1’...
  • Page 1002 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Punch Waste Belt [C]: Punch Waste Hopper [D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt [B].

  • Page 1003: Finisher Jam Detection

    Finisher Jam Detection 2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION Display Mode What It Means Finisher After main machine exit sensor goes OFF, entrance finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even Proof sensor late after enough time to feed 450 mm. R1 to R3 Shift Finisher After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does...
  • Page 1004 Finisher Jam Detection Display Mode What It Means After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper Upper tray exit tray exit sensor does not go ON even after sensor late enough time to feed 485 mm. Shift After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper Upper tray exit tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after sensor lag...
  • Page 1006 FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 D418 R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 10/05/2009 Error Code 31-21 added. 7/27/2011 G3 Switch 05 (SP No.
  • Page 1008 FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 D418 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION ................2 1.1 INSTALLATION: FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 (D418-00)......... 2 1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................ 2 1.1.2 FCU INSTALLATION ................2 FCU (D418-00)..................2 Key Installation and Decal Attachment............ 2 Line Connection and Settings..............2 1.2 INSTALLATION: G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 9001 (D418-06) ....
  • Page 1009 4.1 CAUTIONS ....................2 4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ..............2 4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) ..............2 4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA) ................ 2 4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) ............2 4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)............... 2 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)..............2 4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ................. 2 4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES) ..............
  • Page 1010 5.2.1 FCU ..................... 2 5.2.2 MBU ..................... 2 5.2.3 SG3 BOARD ..................2 5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH..................2 5.3.1 TRANSMISSION.................. 2 Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission ..... 2 Immediate Transmission ................. 2 JBIG Transmission .................. 2 Adjustments..................... 2 5.3.2 RECEPTION ..................2 5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ............

  • Page 1012: Important Safety Notices

    Read This First Important Safety Notices Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
  • Page 1013 Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Cautions, Notes, etc. The following headings provide special information: Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death. Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries. Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
  • Page 1014 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 INSTALLATION: FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 (D418-00) 1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Interface Board Fax Keytop Ferrite Core (ZCAT1730-730A) 1 (NA/TWN) 4’...
  • Page 1015 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) 1.1.2 FCU INSTALLATION Before installing this fax unit: 1) Print out all data in the printer buffer. 2) Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable. FCU (D418-00) Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( x 2).
  • Page 1016 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) Attach the interface board [A] to the controller board securely ( x 2). Remove the jumper [A] on the MBU [B] and set it to the ON position. If the jumper remains at the OFF position, this will cause SC672 (Controller Startup Error) to appear.
  • Page 1017 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) Disconnect three harnesses [A] on the IPU. Install the FCU [A] in the interface board ( x 3). Connect three harnesses [A] to the IPU. D418...
  • Page 1018 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) Remove the two cut-outs [A] from the controller box with a flat-headed screwdriver. 10. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the cables [B] on the speaker unit, and then clamp the cables ( x 2). The required ferrite core is different depending on the area.
  • Page 1019 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) 11. Attach the speaker unit [A] to the controller box ( x 2, x 3). 12. Attach two clamps at [B] and fasten the speaker harness [C] ( x 2). 13. Reattach the controller box cover ( x 13).
  • Page 1020 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) Attach the decal [A] (SUPER G3) to the front door. Attach the serial number decal under the copier serial number decal on the rear cover of the machine. Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine (NA only). Put the power plug into the outlet and turn on the main power of the machine.
  • Page 1021 Installation: Fax Option Type 9001 (D418-00) (RFC-9) [B] as shown. Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector. Connect the telephone cable to the "LINE 1" jack. D418...
  • Page 1022 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) 1.2 INSTALLATION: G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 9001 (D418-06) 1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty G3 Interface Unit G3 Connector Bracket CCUIF Harness Screws (Blue M3 x 6) Edge Saddle Clamp Clamp...
  • Page 1023 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) One G3 Interface Unit Installation Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( x 2). Slide the rear upper cover up, and then remove it. Remove the rear lower cover [B] ( x 2). First slide up the rear lower cover, then slide it down.
  • Page 1024 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Remove the jumper [A] on the MBU [B] and set it to the ON position. If the jumper remains at the OFF position, this will cause SC672 (Controller Startup Error) to appear. D418...
  • Page 1025 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Install the G3 interface unit [A] on the FCU ( x 3). Put the G3 interface unit on the FCU. Tighten three screws. Connect the FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) to the FCU. [A]: Insert the FFC securely as shown above. [B]: Lock the stopper.
  • Page 1026 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Connect the other edge of the FFC to the G3 interface unit. [A]: Insert the FFC securely as shown above. [B]: Lock the stopper. Make sure that both green sides of the FFC face each other Attach the ferrite core (RFC-5) [A] to the cable.
  • Page 1027 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) 11. Remove the three cut-outs [A] from the controller box with a flat-headed screwdriver. 12. Attach the ferrite core (provided with the Fax Unit) [A] to the cables [B] on the speaker unit, and then clamp the cables ( x 2).
  • Page 1028 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) 13. Attach the modular jack [A] to the G3 connector bracket [B]. 14. Attach the edge saddle clamp [A] to the speaker unit [B]. 15. Attach the G3 connector bracket [C] to the speaker unit [B] ( x 2, x 2).
  • Page 1029 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Two G3 Interface Units Installation Do steps from 1 to 5 of "One G3 Interface Unit Installation". Release three clamps on the second G3 unit. Remove the G3 board [A] from the second G3 interface unit [B] ( x 2).
  • Page 1030 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Clamp the cable [A] from the second G3 board ( x 3). Attach the ferrite cores (RFC-5) [A] to each cable [B]. Connect the FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) to the FCU. [A]: Insert the FFC as shown above. [B]: Lock the stopper.
  • Page 1031 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Connect the other side of the FFC to the G3 interface unit. [A]: Insert the FFC as shown above. [B]: Lock the stopper down. Make sure that both green sides of the FFC face each other. Install the FCU assembly [A] in the interface board ( x 3).
  • Page 1032 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) 11. Attach the ferrite core (provided with the Fax Unit) [A] to the cables [B] on the speaker unit, and then clamp the cables ( x 2). The required ferrite core is different depending on the area. For EU/ ASIA/ China, use the ferrite core (ZCAT1730-730A) [C].
  • Page 1033 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) 13. Attach the edge saddle clamp [A] to the speaker unit [B]. 14. Attach the G3 connector bracket [C] to the speaker unit [B] ( x 2, x 2). 15. Install the speaker assembly [A] ( x 2, x 4).
  • Page 1034 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Key Installation and Decal Attachment Remove the blank keytop [A] (3rd from the top) and replace it with one of the keytops provided [B] (either the "Facsimile" keytop or the fax symbol keytop). Attach the multi-language decal [C] (EU only).
  • Page 1035 Installation: G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418-06) Line Connection and Settings Loop one end of the telephone cable [A] once, then enclose it with the ferrite core (RFC-9) [B] as shown. Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector. Attach a ferrite core to the 2nd G3 line if two G3 boards are installed.
  • Page 1036 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 FCU When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Set Date/Time Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).

  • Page 1037: Error Codes

    Error Codes 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report. Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action...
  • Page 1038 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Cross reference Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4 Check the line connection. Check the NCU - FCU connectors. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable Unsuccessful after equalizer.
  • Page 1039 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper or memory space. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable The other end sent RTN equalizer settings.
  • Page 1040 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action confidential or transfer Replace the NCU or FCU. mode Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have disconnected, or it may be defective; try calling another machine. If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line problem.
  • Page 1041 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action (default: 200 ms) Check for line noise or other line problems. Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Cross reference Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1 Check the line connection.
  • Page 1042 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action FCE does not detect the FCU firmware or board defective. 0-55 SG3-V34. SG3-V34 firmware or board defective. The stored message data exceeds the 0-56 SG3-V34 firmware or board defective. capacity of the mailbox in the SG3-V34.
  • Page 1043 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action back to T.30 mode, to noise, etc. because it could not A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot detect a CJ in response pass JM to the other end. to JM Check the line connection and condition. (JM timeout).
  • Page 1044 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The line was disconnected due to The signal did not stop within 10 s. 0-85 abnormal signaling in Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. V.34 control channel If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU. restart.
  • Page 1045 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. JBIG compression or 2-23 Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is reconstruction error frequent. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. 2-24 JBIG ASIC error Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is frequent.
  • Page 1046 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Replace the FCU or the NCU. Communication failed because of an ID Code Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs mismatch (Closed programmed correctly, then resend. 4-10 Network) or Tel. No./CSI The machine at the other end may be mismatch (Protection defective.
  • Page 1047 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Check connections from the NCU to the FCU. G3 ECM - facsimile data Check for a bad line or defective remote frame not received within terminal. 6-05 18 s of CFR, but there Replace the FCU or NCU.
  • Page 1048 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action within 6 s Double registration of the SIP user name. SIP user name 13-17 Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP registration error server is not sufficient. Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server. 13-18 SIP server access error Defective SIP server.
  • Page 1049 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action correct. Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct. Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user name and password settings are correct. Direct SMTP destination incorrect.
  • Page 1050 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP sending. Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. PC not operating correctly. Data Send to SMTP 14-07 SMTP server operating incorrectly Server Failed (4XX) Network not operating correctly.

This manual is also suitable for:

D063D062D066Aficio mp 6001Aficio mp 6001 spAficio mp 7001 ... Show all

Table of Contents